Mikrokosmographia a description of the body of man. Together vvith the controuersies thereto belonging. Collected and translated out of all the best authors of anatomy, especially out of Gasper Bauhinus and Andreas Laurentius. By Helkiah Crooke Doctor of Physicke, physitian to His Maiestie, and his Highnesse professor in anatomy and chyrurgerie. Published by the Kings Maiesties especiall direction and warrant according to the first integrity, as it was originally written by the author.

THE SEVENTH BOOKE, Of the Third and vpper-most Venter called the HEAD, wherein are described the Animall Organes.

The Praeface, Wherein is conteyned the summe of the first Eight Bookes.

AS a Traueller that desireth to make profit of his paine, when he hath passed one Citie before hee enter into another vvill re∣count with himselfe his principall obseruations, especially when the recognition of the former may stand him insteade for his better vnderstanding in that to which hee bendeth his course: so I thinke it not amisse hauing passed through so great variety of partes in the two former Regions of the body of Man, before I enter into the Third, to cal vnto your remem∣brance (not al the particulars before rehearsed, for that would be irkesome to vs both Gentle Reader) but the Principall, as wel to refresh thy memory, as also to make a more easie passage vnto that which followeth.

MAN who is the subiect of our whole Discourse, consisteth of a Soule and a Body. The Soule is the Lady and Mistris, the Soueraigne and Commander. The Body is a most perfect Organ or Instrument of the reasonable Soule, consisting as Hippocrates well saith (though obscurely) of Fire and Water.

For the Soule, albe it when shee is free from the prison of the Bodye can see without an Eye, heare without an Eare and by her owne simple act discourse without the help of spi∣rits; * 1.1 yet so long as she is immured within these wals of clay shee cannot contemplate the speculations of Externall things without an Externall medium; and therefore Nature (by which I vnderstand the wisedome of the eternall Creator) framed the body of many Or∣ganicall parts whereby and wherein the Soule might exercise her Diuine administrations, produce and exhibit the powers and efficacies of her manifold Faculties. For the Body in deede is but a dead trunke till the Soule arriue into it, and quickneth it vnto the perfor∣mance of perfect actions of life.

But because the Soule is of all Formes the most excellent as being created immediately partaker of immortality, Nature in emulation of the diuine Numen hath striuen to make her habitation also immortall, which although the destiny of the matter did gainesay, yet she hath brought to so admirable a perfection that it is worthily called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the wonder of Wonders, the Myracle of Nature, and a Little world.

Whereas therefore there was no proportion or correspondencie betweene mortality * 1.2 and immortality, betweene the Soule and the Body; Nature with wonderfull skil, out of the principall part of the seede did extract and separate a spirit which lay lurking in the po∣wer of the Matter, a spirit I say of a Middle nature betweene Heauen and Earth, by whose mediation as by a strong band the diuinity of the soule might be married to the humanitie

of the body. This instrument of Nature we call Fire, which moueth and illustrateth the whole packe of the members, and moderateth all and singular actions of life, of which also it is the next and most immediate cause.

But because the nature of Fire is such that it hath in it much forme and but a little mat∣ter, neither can diffuse the beames of his light vnlesse it be receiued into some substance * 1.3 wherein his power may be vnited; therfore it was necessary there should be another Prin∣ciple not so subtle, wherein this aetheriall body might expatiate and disport it selfe accor∣ding to the diuersity of his functions and that without danger of expence. Such a Princi∣ple is the mutuall confluence of the seeds of both parents, out of whose slimy matter the Plasticall or formatiue faculty of the wombe stirred vp by the vigor of heate diduceth and distinguisheth the confounded power of the parts into their proper actions, not without a discerning Iudgement and naturall kinde of discourse. This masse of seed irrigated with the power of the whole body according to Hippocrates I call Water; not onely because this Element doth delineate nourish and make fruitefull, but also because the future siccitie and hardnesse of the spermaticall parts stood in neede of a moist and viscid matter whereby those things which otherwise could hardly be sammed together might receiue their con∣glutination, that so of many dissimilar particles, one continued frame might arise.

This farme thus coagmentated and distinguished for the seruice of the soule, we haue * 1.4 in the beginning of this work compared to the whole world or vniuerse, and that not with∣out good ground. For as of the world there are three parts, the Sublunary which is the basest, the Coelestiall wherin there are many glorious bodies, & the highest Heauen which is the proper seate of the Diety. So in the body of man there are three Regions. The low∣er Belly which was framed for the nourishment of the Indiuidium & propagation of man∣kinde. The middle Region of the Chest, wherein the Heart of man the sunne of this My∣crocosme perpetually moueth and poureth out of his bosome as out of a springing fountain the diuine Nectar of life into the whole body, and the vpper Region or the Head where∣in the soule hath her Residence of estate, guarded by the Sences and assisted by the Intellec∣tuall faculties at whose disposition all the inferior parts are imployed.

In the lower Region Nature hath placed two parts more excellent then the rest, wherof * 1.5 one endeuoureth & attendeth the conseruation of the Indiuidium, the other of the Species or kinde. The first is the Liuer which some haue said is the first of all the bowels, both in respect of his originall & of his nature. It is seated in the right Hypocondrium vnder the * 1.6 midriffe. The figure of it if you except his fissure) is continuall, but vnderneath vnequall and hollow, aboue smooth and gibbous. In a man this bowell is proportionably greater then in any other creature, and greatest of all in such as are giuen to their bellies. The pro∣per parenchyma or flesh of this Liuer, which is most like to congealed and adust bloud, by a proper & inbred power giueth the forme, temper and colour of bloud to the Chylus con∣fected in the stomacke, deriued into the guts, prepared in the meseraick veines and bran∣ches of the gate-veine by which also it is transported to the hollow part of the Liuer, there as we saide wrought and perfected, and so conueyed by the same rootes of the gate-veine, and thence exonerated into that which is called the Caua or hollow veine; by whose trunks and boughes it floweth into the whole body. The temperament of this Liuer is hot and moist; for the moderation of which heate and conseruation of the spirits therein contained it receiueth certaine small Arteries which attaine but onely vnto the cauity thereof. It is inuested round with a thinne coate wherein two small Nerues belonging to the sixt con∣iugation of the braine are diuersly dispersed.

We say moreouer; that this same Liuer is the shop or work-house of the venall bloud and the originall of the veines; in whose thrummed rootes the more aery portion of the A∣liment is conuerted by the in bred and naturall faculty of the Liuer into a vaporous bloud, which becommeth a naturall, thicke and cloudy spirit, the first of all the rest and their pro∣per nourishment: which spirit is the vehicle of the naturall faculty, and serueth beside to helpe to transport the thicker part of the bloud through the veines into the whole bodye; where it needeth but a little ayer and therefore is refreshed and preserued only by Transpi∣ration made by the Anastomoses or inoculations of the Arteries with the veines in their extremities or determinations. This Naturall faculty (we before mentioned) is diuided in∣to * 1.7 three faculties, the Generatiue, the Alteratiue and the Increasing faculty. Of the Ge∣neratiue we shall speake by and by. The action of the Alteratiue faculty is Nutrition which hath many handmaides attending her, Attraction, Expulsion, Retention, and Concocti∣on.

The action of the Increasing Faculty we call Accretion, that is, when the whole bo∣dy encreaseth in all his dimensions. Finally, wee say that Concupiscence as it is a distinct Faculty from Reason and Rage, ruleth and beareth sway in the Liuer as in her proper Tri∣bunall, and is distinguished into Libidinem & Cupediam, Lust and Longing.

But because in all her workes Nature euer intendeth immortality, which by reason of * 1.8 the importunate quarrell and contention of contraries she could not attaine in the indiui∣duum or particular, she deuised a cunning stratagem to delude the necessity of Destiny, & * 1.9 by an appetite vnto the propagation of the kinde, hath sowed the seedes of eternity in the nature of Man. For the accomplishing of which propagation shee hath ordained conue∣nient instruments in both fexes, which are for the most part alike, but that the instruments of the Male are outward, those of the Foemale for want of Naturall heate to driue them foorth are deteyned within. The Chiefe of these are the Testicles, two Glandulous bo∣dies of an ouall Figure which in men hang out of the Abdomen and are inuested with four Coats, whereof two are common, the serotum or Cod a thin and rugous skinne, and the Darton which hath his originall from the fleshy Panicle. The other two are Proper, the former is called Erytroides, and the latter Epididymis. The temperament of these Testicks is hot and moyst, and they haue a very great consent with the vpper parts especiallie with the Middle Region, as also hath the wombe. The manner of the Operation of the Te∣sticles is thus.

The matter of the seede, together with the spirites carrying in them the forme and im∣pression of all the particular parts and their formatiue Faculty, falleth from the whole bo∣dy and is receiued by the Spermaticall Vesselles, in whose Labyrinths by an irradiation from the Testicles it is whitened. After it is so praepared it is conveighed to the Epididymis thorough whose insensible passages it sweateth into the spongie and friable substance of the Testicles themselues; where hauing atteined the forme and perfection of seede it is de∣liuered ouer by the eiaculatory or rather the Leading-vessels to the Parastatae, and from them transcolated to the Prostatae, which reserue the seed being now turgid and full of spi∣rits for the necessary vses of Nature. Hence it followeth that that power which is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, the seede-making Faculty, or the Faculty of generation, is from the Testicles immediately, by which Faculty the parts being stirred vp do poure out of them∣selues the matter of the seede when Venus dooth so require. This Faculty is the authour in men of Virility and in women of Muliebrity and breedeth in all creatures that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by which the heate being blowne vp is the cause 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, so that the bloode being heated and attenuated distendeth the Veines, and the bodie or bulke of that part groweth turgid and impatient of his place, which the Grecians call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. And thus much of the Lower Re∣gion.

In the Middle Region there are many parts of great woorth, but the excellencie of the * 1.10 Heart dimmeth the light of the rest, which all are to it but seruants and attendants.

The Heart therefore is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which signifieth to beate because * 1.11 it is perpetually mooued from the ingate to the outgate of life.

This is a Pyramidal Bowell whose Basis is in the middle of the Chest, the mucro or point reacheth toward the left side. The magnitude but small that the motion might be more free and nimble, the flesh very fast and exceeding hot intertexed or wouen with all three kinds of Fibres, and nourished with bloode which it receiueth from two branches of the Coronary Veine.

On the out-side it hath a great quantity of fat and swimmeth in a waterish Lye which is conteyned in the Pericardium wherewith as with a purse the Heart is encompassed.

On the inside it is distinguished by an intermediate partition into two Ventricles. The right is lesse noble then the left and framed most what for the vse of the Lungs. It receiueth a great quantity of blood from the yawning mouth of the Hollow-vein, and after it is pre∣pared, returneth the same blood againe through the Arteriall veine into all the corners of the Lunges. This right ventricle hath annexed to it the greater care and sixe Values are inserted into the Orifices of his vessels. The left Ventricle which is also the most noble hath a thicker wall then the right, because it is the shop of thin blood and vitall spirites. Out of this Ventricle do two vessels issue, the first called the Venall artery which receyueth the ayer prepared by the Lungs and for retribution returneth vnto them vitall blood and spi∣rits; at which artery the left deafe care is scituated, and in whose orifice there slande two Values bending from without inward. The other vessell of the left Ventricle is the Aorta

or great Artery which distributeth vnto the whole body vitall blood and spirits. For accor∣ding as the opinion of some is, it draweth the better part of the Chylus by the Meseraicke Arteries into the bosome of the left ventricle for the generation of arteriall blood, and at his mouth do grow three Values opening inward. We say further that the Heart is the * 1.12 habitation of the vitall Faculty, which by the helpe of Pulsation and Respiration beget∣teth Vital spirits of Ayer and Blood mixed in the left ventricle. And this Faculty although it be vitall yet is it not the life it selfe, and differeth from the Faculty of Pulsation both in the functions and in the extent and latitude of the subiect. The Faculty of Pulsation is Naturall to the heart, as proceeding and depending vpon the Vitall Faculty. For it is not mooued 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or voluntarily as is the Animall Faculty, but onely obeyeth the com∣mand of the necessity of Nature.

From the foresaide Faculty of Pulsation do proceede two motions, the Diastole & the Systole, betweene which there is a double Rest. These motions in the Heart and Arteries are the same and at the same time, but so, that the cause of the motion is supplied from the Heart vnto the Artrries as from a principle both mooued and moouing.

Finally, to come vnto that which we are now in hand withall. In the vpper Region wee meete with the Braine compassed with the strong battlements of the scull, adorned with * 1.13 the Face as with a beautifull Frontispice wherein the Soule inhabiteth, not onely in es∣sence and power as it is in the rest of the body; but in her magnificense and throne of state. This Braine is the most noble part of the whole body and framed with such curiositie, so many Labyrinthes and Meanders are therein, that euen a good wit may easily bee at losse when it is trained away with so diuers sents in an argument so boundlesse and vaste. Not∣withstanding we will as briefely and succinctly as we can giue you a viewe of the Fabricke and Nature thereof, referring the Reader for better satisfaction to the ensuing discourse, wherein we hope to giue euen him that is curious some contentment.

The substance therefore of the Braine is medullous or marrowy, but a proper marrow not like that of other parts; framed out of the purest part of the seed and the spirites. It is * 1.14 moouable and that with a naturall motion which is double, one proper to it self, another comming from without. It is full of sence, but that sence is operatiue or actiue not passiue. For the behoofe of this braine was the head framed, nor the head alone but also the whole body, it selfe being ordained for the generation of animall spirits and for the exhibiting of the functions of the inward senses and the principall faculties: in this brain we are to con∣sider first his parts then his faculties.

The Braine therefore occupieth the whole cauity of the skull, and by the dura mater or hard membrane is diuided into a forepart and a backpart. The forepart which by reason of the magnitude retaineth the name of the whole and is properly called the Braine, is againe deuided by a body or duplicated membrane resembling a mowerssy the, into a right side & a left, both which sides are againe continued by the interposition or mediation of a callous body. This callous body descending a litle downward appeareth to be excauated or hollowd into two large ventricles much resembling the forme of a mans eare, through which caui∣ties a thrumbe of crisped vessels called Plexus Choroides doth run, wherein the Animal spi∣rits receiue their preparation; and out of these Ventricles doe yssue two swelling Pappes which are commonly called the Organes of smelling and do determine at the spongy bone aboue the top of the nose.

These two venticles are disseuered by a fine and thin body called speculum lucidum, or the bright Glasse, vnto which adioyneth the Arch of the braine called Corpus cameratum which is supported by three finials or Columnes which like Atlas do sustaine the weight of the braine, so that the thirde ventricle which lieth vnder them is not obliterated. This middle ventricle which is a common cauity of the two vpper, occupieth the very center of the braine and runneth out with a double passage. The first descendeth to the Basis of the braine where the originall of the Nerues is most manifest, and the extremity thereof endeth in a portion of the Pia mater or thinne membrane very like vnto a Tunnel, through which Tunnell the flegmaticke excrement of the braine is transcolated into the pituitary glandule thereunder disposed, and so thorough the holes of the wedge-bone distilleth into the Pallate of the mouth.

The other passage of the thirde Ventricle which is larger then the former is directed into the fourth Ventricle where the Glandule or Kernell called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 is seated, at each side of which do adioyne the Buttockes of the Braine, and vnder them the Testicles appeare,

which seuer the passage of the Animall spirit out of this into the fourth ventricle. Finally, the fourth ventricle succeedeth, which is the least and most solid of all the rest, and wherein say some, the Animall spirit receiueth his vtmost perfection, and therefore it is made in the Cerebellum that is, the backe-ward or after-braine, which for this very reason was framed of a harder consistence then the former. And so much of the parts of the braine. Now for the faculties; we determine that the Braine is the Pallace of the Rationall Soule, which soule vsing for her instrument the temper & confirmation of the braine, according * 1.15 to the diuersity of her functions bringeth forth mixt actions by the mediation of the ani∣mall spirit. These very actions, produced according to the variety of the temperament and medium, into diuers acts of Ratiocination Imagination and Memory as the soule is best pleased to worke, we call Faculties; which are seated and established together & pro∣miscuously in one and the same place.

Againe, we say that this braine as it is the beginning of the inward, so is it also of the outward senses, from which each of them receiuing their proper vessels or passages toge∣ther with their Faculty do suffer the incursions of Species or Images resorting vnto them according to the diuersity of the Organe. The eye receiueth the visible formes, the care the audible, the nose such as cast an odour from them; and so of the rest. All these indi∣uiduall formes receiued by the sences, are by them resigned vp in token of foealty to the Common sense or priuy-chamber of the soule from whence they receiued their faculties: and then out of those formes the soule gathering phantasmes or notions doth eyther lay them vp in the Memory, or worke vpon them by discourse of Reason. Finally, we attri∣bute to the braine the faculties of sense or motion, which faculties together with the ani∣mall spirit differing in forme and kinde from the vitall, and prepared concocted and perfec∣ted in his ventricles and substance, he doth continually and without intermission transmit through the same Nerues into the whole body to supply the expence of the foresaid spi∣rits, which is made either by action or by passion.

And thus haue wee runne through not onely the two lower Regions to refresh our memories, but also the vpper, wherein the Reader may haue such a taste of that which fol∣loweth, as may haply make him sauour it the better when he commeth thereto. And so wee proceede to our businesse.

CHAP. I. Of the Names, scituation, forme and parts of the head.

HAuing hitherto as exactly as we could and with great leasure made our progresse through the two lower Regions Naturall and Vitall. It is now time we should ascend into the third venter, the seate & very residence of the soule, the sacred Pallace or Tower of Pallas, & there suruay her royall Court, her guard of outward Sences, her Councel∣lors of state and all their aequipage.

This Region therefore is by the Graecians called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 & 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Appians Interpreter holds it was called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, of a word which signifieth to grow dry, because being of a bony substance it must needs be dry. Apollidorus deriues it from the word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 to hide or couer, because it is the couering of the braine. Others because there * 1.16 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the lights are placed. Others 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, from the Cauity or hollownes of it. The Latines call it Caput, because from hence the sences do Capere initium take their be∣ginning.

There is a double acception of the word Caput among Physitions, one strickt & presse, another large and ample. In the strict signification it is vsed by Celsus out of Hippocrates booke of the wounds of the head and thus discribed. The Head is the Mansion and skonce * 1.17 of the braine, whose skull is made of two Tables, between which is a marrow eye substāce called Diplois, inuironed with Caruncles and small veines, ouer which is spread the mem∣brane called Perieranion; which Membrane is couered againe with the hairy scalpe; but vnder the skull lyeth the Membrane called Dura mater. And in this signification the an∣tients called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Vessel of the braine; we also in our common speech cal it the Skonce. * 1.18

But in the large and ample signification, vnder the name of the head we vnderstand all * 1.19 that is circumscribed within the first racke-bone of the Necke and the top of the Crowne. We will intreate of it in this large signification: wherein therefore we are to consider of

the forme, the scituation, the magnitude, the frame and structure, the motion & the par∣ticular parts thereof.

First therefore the head was made round and that for diuers reasons. Inprimis. That it * 1.20 might be of greater receipt and capacity, because it was to receiue the vast and huge bulke of the Braynes. For the braines of a man are foure times as big as of an Oxe: now of all figures the round figure is of most capacity, witnesse the world it selfe.

Secondly, the head was made round ad 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that it might bee lesse subiect to * 1.21 outward iniuries nor so easily wounded. For this figure as it is most capacious, so is it the strongest, because it hath no asperity whereupon a blow might fasten, but is euery where alike smooth, hauing no point whence the dissolution of it should commence.

Thirdly, the head is round for his better motion, that it might be speedily and easily turned to euery side. The Platomists thinke that the head was therefore made round, be∣cause it is the seate and habitation of the soule. For the soule is infused into vs out of hea∣uen which is round. Adde heereto that the most Noble member deserued the most noble figure.

Notwithstanding though the figure of the head be round, yet is it not exquisitely and * 1.22 to a haire globous, but some what long, swelling out with two tops like promontories, which therefore they call heads of land; it is also pressed on the sides. Long it was to con∣taine the braine and the Cerebellum; swelling out before because of the mamillary proces∣ses which are the Organes of smelling, and behind to admit the originall of the marrow of the backe.

It is pressed on the sides, but more forward: first because the processe of the backe cal∣led Dorsalis is much thicker then that ordained for the outlet of the Nerues of the face. Se∣condly, because in the forepart there was to be a bosome or hollownesse, into which the * 1.23 aer was plentifully to passe, that is, the mouth. Thirdly, that the eyes rowling on eyther side, might not haue their prospect hindred by the bones of the temples, which would haue beene if the skull in that place had beene more embowed. Lastly, that the head might stand equally ballanced; for seeing the forepart hath his waight increased by the Iawes, the head would haue waighed too much forward if the back-part had not beene more embow∣ed and runne out as it were into a knowle, which therefore with little alteration in the word and lesse in the sence we call the nowle of the head.

But descanting thus about the figure of the head, it must be vnderstood that we meane a head Naturally disposed; for otherwise of vnnaturall formes some are perfectly round, o∣thers do rise vp in the toppe likk a ridge almost of a house, bearing bredth little in the * 1.24 Crowne. The round head they call in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 because it hath no 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or ietty eyther in the forehead or in the nowle. The sharpe or turbinated head is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or as Athenaeus hath it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 because to them that behold it, it seemeth somewhat sharpe like a * 1.25 suger-loafe. Such a head had Thersites in Homer much like those moulded Cups among * 1.26 the Graecians which were called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Eustathius rather thinketh it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 qua∣si 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which signifieth flame, because flame endeth in a sharpe Cone or spire. But of the formes a little more heereafter when we will also exhibite the pictures both of the Naturall and of the vnnaturall formes.

The magnitude of the head is diuers in diuers creatures, yet greater in man then in any * 1.27 other, because his braines are of a bigger bulke. A little head is alwayes faulty, because it argueth both the impotency and weaknesse of the forming faculty and also the want of spermaticall matter. Whence it is that Physiognomers say, that a little head betokeneth * 1.28 a sudden and rash wit, because in such there is want of spirits, which being pent vp in a nar∣row roome, are heated aboue measure, and beside haue no space to mooue themselues in.

A great head, if other things be aequall, that is, if there be an equal proportion of all the * 1.29 bones is alwayes laudable. Whence Hippocrates in the sixt Book of his Epidemiωn, sayeth that we must esteeme and measure the nature of the bones according to the magnitude of * 1.30 the head: not that the bones doe arise from the head, but because all the bones should proportionably answere to those to which they are articulated or ioyned. For example, The bones of the arme to the shoulder bones, the hippes to the holy-bone, the holy-bone to the racke-bones, the racks to the marrow of the back, the marrow to the brain, the brayn to the skull.

But Aristotle in his Problems sayth that a man is the wisest creature, because he hath * 1.31

a little and a short head. We must vnderstand that by paruitie he meaneth the thinnesse of the bones and the flesh, not that the inward cauity of the skull is little in respect of other creatures.

The head is scituated in the highest place, because say the Platonists it behoued that the * 1.32 intelligible faculty of the Soule, as the Queene and Princesse of the rest should sit in an e∣leuated Tribunall, that the Irascible and Concupiscible faculties as handmaydes should rest at her feete, be seruiceable vnto her and obey her commands. Galen doeth not say in his 8. Booke of the Vse of parts (though Auerrhoes would father it and fasten it vpon him) that the * 1.33 head was made for the eies; (for it was made onely for the braine) but he saith indeede that it was lifted vp into the highest place because of the eyes. For the eies being ordained as * 1.34 scout-watches, to looke out for vs night and day; it was requisite that their station should bee in the highest place; but because the sight stoode in neede of the softest sinew and the shortest, least his soft body if it had beene any thing lengthned might haue beene in danger of breaking: therefore it was necessary that the braine which is the originall of sinewes should be placed neare the eies: neither doth this scite of the braine auaile the eies onely, but also all the sences, for the smel better apprehendeth an ascending vapour, and the voice is better heard from aboue.

The Head is diuided into two parts, the one is hayrie the other without haire: the hai∣ry * 1.35 part is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Calua the scalp; that which is without haire is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Factes the face. The scalpe from the cauity and roundnes of it is called by Aristotle in the first Booke of his Historie of creatures and the 7. Section, and by Pollux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. This compre∣hendeth all the vpper part, backward as farre as the haire groweth, forward to the forehead: it hath three partes. The forepart reacheth from the foreheade to the Coronall suture or * 1.36 crowny seame & taketh vp almost halfe of the head; it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which signifieth to water, because it is the softest and the moystest; Sinciput also of the Latines, as if it were summum caput the top of the head, although there be a higher place.

The backpart of the scalp reacheth from the Lambdall suture to the first rack-bone of * 1.37 the necke. Hippocrates in his Booke de vulneribus capitis, calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Aristotle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it is fibrous and neruous, for many tendons reach vnto it; be∣side almost all the nerues arise from about that part, in Latine occiput or occipitium as Plan∣tus hath it; we call it the nowle. The middle part of the scalpe betweene these is gibbous or round called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 to hide as it were 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because that part of the head is especially couered with haires.

Galen in the 11. Booke of the Vse of parts and the 14. Chapter, calleth it aruumpilorū the Field of haires: the Latines call it vertex, because in that place the haires runne round * 1.38 in a ring as waters doe in a whirle-poole. Finally, the sides of the scalp betwixt the eyes, the eares and the necke are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, sayeth Aristotle in his first Booke of his History and the eleauenth Chapter, because the pulse is there very manifest, the Latines cal them Tempora, because their gray haires and sunken flesh bewray the age of a man.

Againe, the parts of the scalp are contayning and contayned. The contayning parts * 1.39 are some of them Common some proper. The Common, are the Cuticle or scarfe-skinne, the true skinne bearing a wood or bush of haire, the fat and the fleshy pannicle. The pro∣per contayning parts are either externall or internall. The externall are two membranes, pericranium and periostium, certain muscles and the bones of the head. The proper inward conteyning partes are the two mothers called Meninges, dura and Pia, which encompasse both the skull and the braine.

The parts contayned are the braine and the Cerebellum or after-braine, from which a∣riseth the marrow, which when it is gotten out of the skull is properly called the marrow of * 1.40 the backe, or pith of the spine, from which doe arise many nerues as well before it issue out of the skull as after. Of these we will first entreat, and then after of the part without hayre or the face in the booke following.

CHAP. II. Of the common containing parts of the head.

THE common contayning parts of the head are fiue; the Haires, the Cuticle, the Skinne, the Fat and the fleshy pannicle; of all which wee haue spoken * 1.41 heretofore at large; yet because in euery one of these there is some diffe∣rence from the same parts in other places of the body wee must a little here insist vpon them: and first of the haires.

Albeit therefore the haire is generally more or lesse all ouer the body as before is sayd, yet aboue all places the head is adorned with the greatest aboundance of them. The haires of the head are the longest of the whole body, because sayeth Aristotle in his first Booke de Generatione Animalium and the third Section the braine affoordeth toward their nourish∣ment * 1.42 a large supply of humour or vaporous moysture whether you will, which also is most clammy and glutinous. For the braine is the greatest of all the glandulous bodies. They are also in the head stiffest, because the skinne of the head is the thickest, yet is it rare and full of open pores, so sayeth Galen in his ninth Booke de vsu partium and the first Chapter. * 1.43 In the head Nature hath opened conspicuous and visible waies for the vaporous and smo∣ky or sooty excrements, for the head is set vpon the body as a roofe vppon a warme house, so that vnto it doe arise al the fuliginous & vaporous excrements from the subiected parts * 1.44 The haires of the head are called in Latine Capilli, as it were Capitis pili, by Pollux and Es∣chylus 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 to cutte. In men they are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Caesaries, because they are often mowed; in women 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 to dresse with diligence, from whence haply wee haue out worde to combe, or rather from the Latin word Coma, whose signification is all one with the former. In woemen they are diuided by a line, which separation the Greeks call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the Latins discrimen and aequamentum, in English we cal it the shed of the haire.

The skinne of a man although in comparison of other creatures it is most thinne; yet if * 1.45 you compare the skinne of the head with that of the chest or the lower belly it is very thick as also is the cuticle. And therefore Columbus insulteth ouer Aristotle for saying that the skinne of the head is very thinne.. The place is in the 3. Booke of his history and the elea∣uenth Section, where hee doth not say that the skinne of the head is very thinne, (for in the * 1.46 fift Booke de Generatione Animalium and the third Chapter, hee calleth the skinne of the head 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, very crasse and thicke) but he saith and that truely that the skinne of a man in respect of his magnitude is very thin.

Well, the skinne of the head as it is the thickest, so sayeth Galen in his second Booke de Temperamentis and the 5. Chapter, it is so much drier then the skinne of the rest of the bo∣dy by how much it is harder; yet is it rare sayeth Aristotle in the place next aboue named, that the sooty excrements might be auoided for the generation of haire as before is sayed. It hath vesselles running in it, Veines from the outward braunch of the externall iugulars, * 1.47 which creeping on both sides are vnited in the forehead, and are sometimes opned in grie∣uous paines of the head, and these veines running vnder the drie and hairie skinne carrie bloud vnto it for nourishment. Arteries it hath also from the outward branch of the Ca∣rotides * 1.48 deriued to the rootes of the eares and to the temples especially, which bring Vitall spirits vpward from the Heart.

It receyueth also certaine endes of Nerues reflected vpward from the first and seconde coniugation of the Neck to giue it sense. I saide ends of Nerues, for so saith Gal. in his sixe∣teenth booke de vsu partium and the 2. Chapter. The skinne hath not a proper & definite * 1.49 Nerue belonging vnto it as euery Muscle hath his Nerue disseminated in or about his bo∣dy but there attaine vnto it certaine Fibres from the subiected parts which connect or knit it to those parts, and also affoord sense vnto it. The sense of this skinne of the heade is not fine and exquisite as in the Chest or the Lower belly. Aristotle in the third booke of his Historie and the eleuenth Chapter saith, it hath no sense at al and rendreth a reason because it eleaueth to the bone without any interposition of Flesh. But Galen disprooueth this o∣pinion in his sixeteenth Booke of the Vse of Parts and the second Chapter. It may bee A∣ristotle meant the Cuticle and not the true skinne. Or excuse him as Archangelus dooth, * 1.50 who sayth that he meant it of the true skin, but as it is a similar part distinct from a Nerue, for indeede onely the Nerues haue sense. Bauhine and Laurentius giue another reason why the skinne of the Heade is lesse sensible, because (say they) in the Heade the skinne adhereth but to a Musculous or fleshie Membrane, whereas in other parts it cleaueth to a Neruous Membrane.

The vse of the skin of the head is to compasse the scull and be a couering vnto it. * 1.51

There is no fatte at all saith Platerus vnder the skinne of the Heade, and hee giueth his Reasons, first because there is no vse of it, for the small vesselles vnder the hairie Scalpe * 1.52 are placed in sufficient safetie, there needed therefore no Fatte at all to secure them. Se∣condly, because there had beene an abuse of it. For in the infant the Head is proportio∣nably * 1.53 to the other partes exceeding great, but if it had any fatte about it, it woulde haue

bene a great remora or impediment in the birth. But Vesalius in his seuenth Booke & the 18. chapter saith, that a man may easily with his hands diuide the skin with the fat and the * 1.54 fleshy Membrane from the scull. And Columbus saith that beside the Yard and the Codde there is no part but a man may finde fat in it. The trueth is, that in the fore-head there is none at all, for because in the fore-head the skin is moued at our disposition it would haue beene a hinderance to his motion, for that in this place the skin is vnited to a Musculous substance, but in and about the Occipitium or nowle of the heade there is some fat to bee found.

The fleshy Membrane spred vnder the skin cleaueth close vnto it in the foreheade, be∣cause * 1.55 there is no fat to separate them, and there this Membrane is very thick. It also some∣times runneth like a Tendon from the Muscles of the forhead to the Muscles of the nowle and the eares, insomuch that Fallopius warneth vs to take heede least we mistake it for the Pericranium, and the Pericranium for the Periostium. And thus much for the common in∣uesting parts of the Head, how they differ from the same parts in other places of the Bo∣die.

CHAP. III. Of the Pericranium Periostium, and the Muscles about the Head.

THE Membrane which lyeth next vnder the fleshye Pannicle is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it compasseth the whole scull on the out-side. The A∣rabians * 1.56 call it Almocat and Almocatin. Laurentius woulde haue it called Periostium. And Fallopius in his Institutions and in his Booke de Ossibus * 1.57 and the 19. chapter saith, that this Membrane is common to all the Bones about the scull & called Pericranium, but by his common name Periostion. It is scituated be∣twixt the fleshy Panicle and the Periostium, to both which it is tied by certaine Fibres. Soft it is and thin, but thight and solid saith Laurentius and of exquisite sense. It ariseth from certaine processes of the Dura Meninx like thin Membranes or rather Ligaments (for they haue the vse of Ligaments) passing through the sutures or seames of the scull. For euerie * 1.58 one of these Ligaments are extended ouer that part of the scull against which they yssued, and going on meete one with another and are exactly vnited so that all of them put toge∣ther make a common membrane. This membrane dooth not onely encompasse the scull, but also the temporall Muscles although the Anatomistes commonly take it in that place * 1.59 for the coate of the temporal Muscles or for a Tendon of them, making them to haue two Tendons, one outward another inward, whereas indeede saith Fallopius in his obseruations it is nothing else but a part of the Pericranium. Yet doth it not clothe these Muscles so farre as to their insertion, but onely as farre as the Iugall bones and that for their safegarde; and the better it may doe them this good turne because in that place it is thicke and harde; it parteth therefore from these Muscles neere vnto the Iugall bone as is said, where between the Membrane and the Muscles on either side there is a little what of fat to be found.

The vse of this Pericranium is to binde and rowle the scull on the outside round about as it were with a rowle or swathing band whereby his bones are firmed; it knitteth also the * 1.60 Dura Meninx to the scul, and hangeth it so that it cannot fall or presse vpon the Braine. Pla∣terus addeth that it tyeth vnto it selfe the skin of the head and that very strongly, because there is no flesh nor fat betweene them, and that is the reason that onely the skinne of the head when it is wounded needeth not to besewed together, because the lippes of it doe * 1.61 not nor cannot start farre asunder being held together by this membrane.

Next vnder this lyeth the Periostium, which saith Vesalius you may seuer from the Peri∣cranium with the point of a knife, although Fallopius thinke they are both one, and Lauren∣tius * 1.62 conceyueth that Anatomists are deceiued by the thicknesse of the Pericranium, which heere was necessary because it couereth a noble bone. But Bauhine whom we wil now fol∣low describeth them seuerally. The Periostium therefore is a Neruous Membrane and therfore very strong and thin. It cleaueth very strongly to the scul as also it doth to the rest of the bones; the reason is, because the bones being very hard substances would not bee * 1.63 altred or affected with any obiect, & so want the benefit of the Tactile quality, vnlesse they had beene couered with this Membrane of exquisite sense, by whose assistance now they are not destitute of feeling; whence by the Grecians it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, Circumossa∣lis about the bone; for it compasseth all the bones excepting the teeth onely saith Varo∣lius, but we may also except the inside of the scull and the articulations or ioyntes of the

bones; for if it had beene extended ouer the ioynts we could not haue mooued them with∣out paine. Some, saith Columbus, being ignorant of this Membrane haue maintayned that the bones themselues are not destitute of sense.

The Muscles about the head are very many, some arise from the lower part of the scull, * 1.64 others are disposed vnder the skinne of the fore-head moouing it for the behoofe of the eyes, whereupon the skinne of the fore-head is rugous, full of transuerse and right lines; some also there are couched vnder the hairy scalpe, sometimes (for they are not perpetu∣all) by which the whole scalpe and the eares in some men are mooued; Finally, others be∣long to the neather iaw (for the vpper is immooueable) of all which we shall particularlie entreate in our Booke of Muscles.

CHAP. IIII. Of the diuers Figures of the Head, the Sutures and substance of the Scull.

BEfore we come to entreate of the Bones and Sutures of the scull, which we purpose in this place but lightly to handle, it shal not be amisse to adde a lit∣tle to that which hath beene already saide concerning the whole figure and fashion of the head, because if the figure be changed then must the Sutures or seames needs alter both in scituation and in number, as Hippocrates saith in his booke de Ossibus, and after him Galen in diuerse places, although I knowe that there are some great Anatomists who are not of this minde.

[illustration]

Table 1. sheweth the Figures of the Head. Fig. 1. exhibiteth the Natural and blamelesse conformation of the Heade on oneside, the other foure Figures are all depraued & faulty.

[illustration]

TABVLA I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. IIII.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

The Figure therefore of the * 1.65 head is double, Naturall and Good, or else depraued. The Naturall Figure [Ta. 1. fig. 1] is that which is like a long sphere, on both sides nere the temples by little and little de∣pressed and made narrower, but at each end shooting out; yet so that the backe parte is more capacious, that so it might stand vppon the Necke equally balanced. For because the fore-part though it be not so much compassed nor so much embowed, yet by rea∣son of the bones especiallie of the vpper iawe is some-what heauy, it was needfull that the back-part should be made as heauy by the capacity therof.

The depraued figure is what soeuer varieth from the for∣mer description. I dare not * 1.66 cal it in opposition to the for∣mer Vnnatural, because some very good Anatomistes haue interposed their iudgementes & determined that all figures of the head are Natural, albeit they vary somewhat from the exact forme: yet Archangelus calleth these depraued figures Praeter Naturam.

This depraued figure Ga∣len in his ninth booke De vsu partium and the 17. chapter calleth by a Generall name 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, for in that place he reckoneth the round and globy head as a kinde of that 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. There be three sortes of them. The first

[illustration]

Table 2. sheweth some bones and sutures of the head.

[illustration]

Figure 6. sheweth the left side.

[illustration]

Figure 7. sheweth the right side, the yoke-bone be∣ing remoued.

[illustration]

TABVLA. II.

[illustration]

FIG. VI.

[illustration]

VII.

• AB, The Coronall suture.
• CD, The Lambdal suture.
• E, the Sagittall suture.
• FGHΩ, the fourth proper circular suture.
• IK, The bones of the Sinciput.
• L, the forehead bone.
• M, the occiput or nowle bone.
• N, the bones of the Temples,
• O, the wedge bone.
• Φ 7, the fourth hole of the wedge bone in the orb of the eie.
• P 7, Foure processes of the wedge bone marked with 2, 3, 4, 5.
• QQQ the first bone of the vpper iaw,
• R, the prominence of this bone toward the tem∣ples,
• SSS, A semicircle in the skull, from whence the temporal muscle doth arise.
• TT, the fourth bone of the vpper iaw.
• VX, the yoke bone.
• Y, A suture in the yoke bone which some haue accounted for the fourth common suture.
• Ω 6, aa 7, the forepart of the fourth proper suture.
• b, the fift proper suture of the skull running ob∣liquely from H to g.
• c 7, A scale growing sometimes to the wedge∣bone
• d 7, A line distinguishing this scale from the bone
• ee, the lower part of the second common suture at the sides of the pallat,
• f 7, the first suture of the vpper iaw in the cheeke.
• ggg, the first common suture in the side of the eie∣brow,
• h 7, A cauity of the temples made for the articu∣lation of the lawer iaw,
• i, the appendix of the temples called Styloides,
• k, the mammillary processe of the temples,
• l 7, the heads of the occiput or nowle bone where it is articulated with the first rack-bone,
• m 6, A suture betwixt the bone of the iaw and the forehead,
• n 6, The third bone of the vpper iaw.

[Table 1. figure 2.] wherein the eminence or out bearing before, shooting from the vpper part of the forehead is wanting, although the backward eminence in the nowle bee faire to be seene.

The second is quite contrary vnto this, in which [Table 1. figure 3.] the backward out∣shoote in the nowle is wanting but not that in the forehead.

The third [Table 1. figure 4.] in which both the eminences or out-shoots are wanting. There may bee another added to these three which many esteeme but onely imaginarie, and that is when the skull swelleth more in compasse toward each eare then it doth either forward or backward. But Galen in the place next aboue named saith and prooueth, or at∣least seemeth so to doe, that this is a meere speculatiue thing, but cannot be indeed in Na∣ture, * 1.67 for then sayth he the fabricke of the braine must needes be ouerthrowne, yea it would proue a Monster and cannot liue. Vesalius is of opinion that Hippocrates maketh mention of this forme, and beside telleth a story of an Innocent as wee tearme them or foole in Ve∣nice, whose braine was of that shape; Falopius gain-sayes him, and auoucheth that Hippocra∣tes made mention onely of three sortes, and that he mistooke the figure of the childs head at Venice of the same minde also is Eustachius.

There may be a fift figure added out of Hippocrates, and that is an acuminated or sharp figure, wherein the left figure is but a little altered. This figure, sayeth hee in his booke * 1.68 de aëre aquiset locis, and the 35. Text, was first made by Art: for the Midwiues vsed to presse

[illustration]

Table 3. Fig. 8. Sheweth the fore-side of the Skull, as also the bones, the holes or perforations and the Sutures both of the Skull and of the vpper Iaw.

[illustration]

TABVLA. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IIX.

[illustration]

IX

• A A. A hole in the fore-head bone.
• B B. The hole of the fourth bone of the vpper Iaw, which is in the Cheeke.
• C. A hole of the second bone of the vpper Iaw in the inward angle of the eye.
• D D. The fourth hole of the wedge-bone in the out∣ward side of the eye.
• E E. the first hole of the same bone,
• G. the second hole.
• H, the third hole of the same bone in the seate of the eye.
• I I. the forehead bone.
• K, the left bone of the Sinciput.
• L, the left bone of the temples.
• M. the mammillary processe of the temples.
• N N, the wedge-bone.
• Γ Γ Γ, the first bone of the vpper Iaw.
• Δ, the second bone of the vpper Iaw,
• θ, the third.
• ΛΛ, the fourth in the eft eye.
• ξξ, the fift bone of the vpper Iaw in the nose.
• O O. the bridge or partition of the Nostrils.
• P, the Suture in the yoke-bone.
• Q, A part of the second common Suture from the first N, to S.
• R S T V Y X Z. the third common Suture drawne obliquely through the Orbe of the eye.
• a D, the first externall Suture of the vpper Iaw in the Cheeke, and from thence through the eye to Q.
• b the third externall Suture of the vpper Iaw from b to c.
• c, the second externall Suture of the vpper Iaw in the eye.
• e, the fourth externall Suture reaching to ξ.
• f, the sixt externall Suture of the vpper Iaw in the middle of the Nose.
• g, the second internall Suture in the Nose.
• h, the seauenth externall Suture of the vpper Iaw.
• i, A bastard Suture of the vpper Iaw at the eye,
• Fig. 9, Sheweth the Basis of the Skull, and many holes and Sutures therein.
• A, the end of the coronall Suture. C C, the lower additaments of the Lambdall Suture on either side. D, the fourth hole of the wedge-bone in the outside of the Orbe of the eye. F, A part of the fourth pro∣per Suture. H, the great hole of the occipitium made for the Spinall marrow. K, A part of the bone called Sinciput. L L, A part of the forehead bone. M M, the lower part of the nowle bone. N, A rift or cleft of the wedge bone which is common to the bones of the temple, drawne on the left side from •• to ••. O O, the wedge bone. P, His foure processes marked 2, 3, 4, 5, A R, the sixt hole of the wedge bone at the bottome of the throte, A, the seauenth hole of the same at R. Γ, the first bone of the vpper Iaw. S Λ, the fourth. π, the sixt, where the cutter betwixt c and π, hath not well expressed the Suture. T T, the bones of the temples on either side. V, the fourth hole of the bones of the temple made for the hearing. σ, the bridge or partition of the nose. X, the first hole of the temple bone in his Basis. Y Y, the yoke bone. a a, the anterior part of the fourth proper Suture. b, the lower part of the fift proper oblique Suture, c, the lower part of the bridge of the nose which is like a coulter where 3 is placed, d the vpper part of the second common Suture. f, the first externall Suture of the vpper Iaw in the Cheeke. g, the first common Suture in the side of the brow. h, the cauity of the temples whereto the lower Iaw is articulated, ii, the appendix of the temple bone called Styloides. k the mammillary processe of the same temples. l l, the knub of the nowle bone, m m, the 6 proper oblique Suture of the Skull, n n, the 7 trāsuerse Suture, o p, A line beginning from the last named Suture which climeth by the temples, & is more like a diuision then a line. q q, the lower part of the 2 commō Suture of the Skull in the hollownes of the nose, r, the line of the hole of hearing, s ae, the stony bones, t v, the 5 externall transuerse Suture of the vpper Iaw, X y, the 7 exter∣nall right Suture, α β, A bastard Suture of the vpper Iaw in the Pallate, γ, the hole of the eare, ♌, the 5 hole of the temples neere vnto •••• processe where Y should be blotted out, B, A hole of the nowle bone which is not alwayes found, E, the 2 hole of the nowle bone made for the 6 coniugation of the sinewes & for the iugular veine & artery, H, the 1 hole of the occipitium or nowle bone for the passage of the marrow, ••, the 3 hole for the outgate of the 7 coniugation, χ Λ, two holes of the nose, μ ν, two holes in the Pallate which is accounted the 4 of the wedge-bone, ξ, Fiue holes in the basis of the wedge-bone, π, the hole of the 4 bone of the vpper Iaw in the Pallate. Note that M, V, at the right side pointeth out the cauity which the yoke bone maketh for the passage of the temporall muscles.

the heads of Infants lightly on euery side to make them rise somewhat toward the crowne, and after so rowled it with bands till that forme was confirmed; the reason was saith Hippa. because the people had an opinion that it was a signe of a generous & noble disposition to be so featured; afterward Nature imitated Art and children were so borne; Quintilian in his second Booke and 17. Chapter, saith that Pericles had an accuminated head and some∣what long, and his words came thronging and thundring out, not peaceably as other mens; so we see, saith Bauhine, that most of the French and low Countrie men haue long heades, because they vse to lie with their heades vppon their Temples or on one side: whereas the Germanes haue most what round heads, because from their very infancie they lye vppon their backes.

Finally, Vesalius maketh mention of a begger of Bononia whose head was foure square, * 1.69 sauing that it was a little broader then long. And my selfe haue seene in Lincolneshire a wondrous small head made very like the ridge of a house neere vnto sharpnes al the length * 1.70 through, that boy was a foole and a wondrous great eater; and so much of the figures and fashions of the head.

The skull or cranium is all that bone which compasseth the braine and after-brain like * 1.71 a helmet, which is not made of one bone, least this brain-pan by one wound should be bro∣ken throughout, as we see a pot will be, the rift running quite through from the top to the bottome. It is made therefore of many bones ioyned together with sutures or seames like the teeth of two sawes set one against the other [tab. 1. and tab. 5. fig. 13.]

These sutures are of two sortes, proper and common. The proper sutures are either * 1.72 true or false, the true sutures are three, two of them transuerse, the third runneth along the head.

The first is that which is in the forepart called Coronalis [Table 2. ^AB table 4. figure 11. ⁿⁿ] and distinguisheth the forehead bone from the bone of the sinciput [Table 2. ^L from ^I to ^K.]

The second suture is in the nowle [table 2. ^CD table 4. ^PP] and is called I ambdoides sepa∣rating the bone of the nowle or occiput [table 2. ^M from ^I to ^K] from the bone of the synciput: this suture is sometimes double, containing in the middle a bone with three corners called Triangulareos.

The third suture is in the middest betwixt these two [table 2. figure 1. ^P table 9. fig. 2. ^CO] and is called sagittalis, it is a straight seame and diuideth the bones of the synciput [tab. 2. fig. 6. ^IK] descending sometimes euen to the nose.

The false sutures are not so conspicuous as the former; some reckon foure.

The first are two, on either side one aboue the eares [table 2. ^FGH] aboue the bones called * 1.73 petrosa or the rockie bones. They are not properly called sutures, but are rather scalie aglu∣tinations. The second two belong to the bone called sphenoides or the wedge bone, on the forepart and the hindpart.

The common sutures are those that belong as well to the skull as to the vpper iaw, and they are fiue. The first is in the outside of the brow. [table 2. figure 6. and 7. ^gg table 3. fig 8. ^R figure 9. ^g.] * 1.74 The second is double, the vppermost is in the outside of the eye & the hol∣low part of the Temples [table 3. figure 8. from ^s to ^Q at figure 9. at ^d table 2. figure 7. at ^d] The lowerwost is at the sides of the pallat. [table 3. figure 9. from ^d to ^c] The third is in the inner and laterall part of the eye. [table 3. figure 8. ^RSTVXYZ]

The fourth runneth through the middest of the iugall bone [table 2. figure 6. ^T table 3. fig. 9. ^Y fig. 8. ^P.]

The fift is in the bredth of the nose and is common [tab. 3. fig. 9. vnder 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.] to the sphenoides, or wedgebone and the bridge of the nose.

The vse of the sutures is to giue way to the thicke and sooty excrements; againe to tye the dura meninx to the skull, and to giue way for the filaments of the same which make the * 1.75 Pericranium and Periostium as is sayed; and finally to giue ingate and outgate to the ves∣selles.

Beside the sutures, the skull it selfe is crasse; rare and full of holes.

Crasse or thicke for the security of that therein contained.

* 1.76 Rare that it might not be too great a burthen; and full of holes [tab. 4. fig. 11. 12. ^L tab. 7 fig. 14. ^C] to giue way to the transpiration of sooty excrements.

It is also made of a double table as we call it, or of two leaues [table 5. fig. 14. ^ao] which may best be distinguished about the place of the browes, the outward of these may bee ca∣ten * 1.77

away by the French disease, the inner remaining sound.

Betwixt these Tables are conueyed Veines and Arteries for the life and nourishment * 1.78 of the scull, among which vessels there is a kinde of medullous or marrowy substance [tab 5. fig. 14. betwixt ^a and ^{o c}] which some call Meditullium.

These Tables are oftentimes perforated in many places but without order, thorough * 1.79 which perforations small vesselles passe into the inward Cauity euen to the dura Meninx.

On the outside the scull is smooth, but if you turne the bottome vpwarde it is full of inaequalities and protuberations. Of all which we shall entreate more at large in our book of bones.

CHAP. V. Of the bones proper to the Scull.

THE bones of the head are of two sorts, some are proper to the scul alone, some belong to the vpper iaw also. The bones proper to the scul alone are six in num∣ber * 1.80 (for wee goe not now precisely to worke to account the small bones of the eares) those of the Iaw two.

[illustration]

Tab. 4. Fig. 10. sheweth the inner and lower part of the scul, together with many holes especial∣ly those of the Wedge-bone. Figure 11. shew∣eth the vpper part of the inside of the scull cut from the Lower.

[illustration]

TABLVA IIII..

[illustration]

FIG. X.

[illustration]

FIG. XI.

• A, The Wedge-bone. B, his first hole.
• C, the corner of that hole.
• D, the anterior transuerse cauities of this bone in which the Optick nerues are hidden.
• E, The latter of these fouresquare wherein the pituitarie Glandule lyeth.
• F, The forward passage through which the Flegme gathe∣red together is deriued.
• G, The second hole of the Wedge-bone in the vpper part of the orbe of the eye.
• H, the third in the bottome of the eye.
• I, the small holes of the spongy bone.
• K, A cleft of this bone through which the dura meninx is tied. L 10, 11, the cauity of the for-head bone betwixt the two Tables.
• M, the Wedge-bone in this place hath oftentimes a per∣foration.
• N, A cleft or slit common to the Wedge-bone & bones of the Temples.
• O, the last of the Wedge-bone. Q, the sixt hole.
• R, the 7 hole in the chops at the bottome of the throate.
• SS, 10, 11 and T, Certain inscriptions or furrowes in the scull, impressed by the veines of the Dura Meninx.
• V, the eight hole of the Wedgebone at the nostrils.
• X. The fift hole of the same bone. Y, 11, the Fontanell
• ZZ A cauity made for the forwarde extuberarions of the braine.
• a The sixt hole of the Temple-bones, which is the fourth for the hearing.
• b, The second hole of the nowle-bone.
• c The third, d the first, e the second, f, g, the two Posterior cauities of the scull.
• h, 10, 11, the extreamity or ende of the third and middle cauity.
• ii, 11, A Bosome of this passage running thorough the length of the scull,
• i, 10, A bosome common with the nowle bone, m, 11, Certaine small holes in the inside of the bone of the synciput. n, n, 11, the Coronal suture.
• oo, 11, The sagittall suture. pp, 11. the Lambdal suture.
• qq, 10, 11. The 4 suture called Squami-formis.
• rr, The forepart of this suture compassing some part of the wedge-bone.
• s, A part of the Lambdall suture, which some call the 6. proper suture.
• t, A line that ioyneth the ends of the Lambdal suture, cal∣led by others the 7 proper transuerse oblique suture.
• u, u. The eight proper transuerse suture.
• x, The bridge or partition of the spongie bone.
• αα. The processes of the Wedge-bone called Clinoides.

The first bone of the scull is called Os Frontis the fore-head bone: [Tab. 2, fig. 6, 7. ^L Tab. 3, fig. 8. ^{I I}] it is circumscribed with the Coronall suture, [Tab. 2, fig. 6, ^C. fig. 7, ^{A B}] and that * 1.81 which is common to the head and the vpper iaw. [Tab. 3, fig. 8, ^R. Table 2. fig. 6, and 7, ^g] In this bone on either side the browes [Tab, 4. fig. 10 & 11 at ^L] there is a notable bosome or hollownesse, wherein is conteyned a soft and medullous matter, or haply it was framed to contein aer for the sense of smelling. It hath two processes, the one reaching toward the lesse, the other toward the greater angle of the eie, & make the vpper part of the orb ther∣of. The second and third are called Ossa syncipitis, [Tab. 2 fig. 6, ^{I K}] they are full of dens or small holes on the inside with many inscriptions like the path of a snaile or Emmet [Tab. 4 fig 10 and 11 SS] * 1.82 where the vessels runne. They are fouresquare, of substance in respect of the rest very thin and weak. They are limited backward by the Lambdal Suture [Tab. 2. fig 6, ^{D C}] forward by the Coronall [Tab. 2, fig. 6, ^{A B}] and belowe by the scalie Sutures of the Temple-bones. [Tab. 2. fig. 6, ^{G F H}]

The fourth is called Os Occipitis the Noddle or Nowle-bone. [Tab. 2, fig. 6 and 7 ^M. Tab. 3, fig. 9 ^MH] It is ioyned aboue to the bones of the synciput [Tab. 2, fig. 6. ^{I K}] by the Lābdall su∣ture; [Tab. 2, figure 6, ^{C D}] at the sides to the Temple-bones, [Tab. 3, fig. 9, in ^C] in the mid∣dest * 1.83 to the wedge bone. [Tab. 3, figure 9, O O] The figure of it is almost rounde, the sub∣stance is very thicke and hard, yet but thin and weake at the side of the great hole made in it, [Tab. 3, fig. 9. ^• Tab. 4. fig. 10, ^d] through which the marrow entreth into the rack-bones of the necke. It hath nine bosomes or hollownesses. On the inside seauen, on the outside two. Fiues holes or outlets; and lastly two processes or heads [Tab. 3, fig. 9, ^ll] broad, co∣uered with a Cartilage or Gristle which are inserted into the cauities of the first rack-bone of the neck vpon which the head is mooued. Backward it hath a small processe like a tooth which is receiued by the first racke-bone.

The fift and the sixt are called Ossa temporum the Temple bones, or Lapidosa the stonie bones. [Tab. 2. fig. 6. and 7 ^N. Tab. 3 fig. 9 ^TT] They are ioyned aboue by the scaly Suture * 1.84 [Tab. 2, fig. 6, 7 ^{F G H}] to the bones of synciput, below to the additament of the nowle-bone by the sixt suture, [Tab. 3. fig. 9 ^{m n}] to the first bone of the vpper iawe by the fourth com∣mon suture. [Tab. 2, fig. 6 ^Y] Each of these hath foure processes. The first is called Mamil∣laris. [Tab. 2, fig. 6 and 7 ^K. Tab. 5. fig. 8 ^H. Fig. 9, ^R] The second is called Styloides. The third Labyrinthus, conteyning the small bones of the eare. The fourth is a parte of the Iugall bone.

CHAP. VI. Of the two Bones common to the Scul and the vpper Iaw.

THE two Bones which belong as well to the vpper iaw as to the scull, are cal∣led Sphenoides or the Wedge-bone, and Spongoides the spongy bone called * 1.85 also Cribriforme or Ethmoides. The first is set like a Wedge (whence it hath his name) betwixte the bones before described and the bones of the Vpper iaw, so that it toucheth them almost all. In infants it is made of foure bones but after we are growne it also groweth into one entire bone. And because it hath many processes and inequalities on both sides, a man can compare it to no one thing, wherfore the Ancients called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as if we should say, seare-shaped.

The substance of it is fast and strong, but the inside somewhat spongie. It hath many processes, two on the inside called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, two called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 like Bats winges, and foure small ones which make the saddle or seate.

It hath also many hollownesses or bosomes, some outward in the wingie processes, o∣thers inward, in which [Tab. 4. fig. 10, at C] the Opticke Nerues are ioyned, then the sad∣dle itselfe wherein is the Glandule placed [Tab. 4. fig. 10, ^•] which receiueth the Phlegme, from whence afterward it floweth into the Palate and the Nosethrils.

It hath also many cauities and ten holes, fiue in the Orbe of the eye, and other fiue in the basis of the Scull. The exact description of all which you must looke for in the booke of Bones.

The second bone common to the Skull and the vpper Iaw is called Spongoides or Eth∣moides Cribre forme; because it is full of holes as a Siue or searce, but it may better be cal∣led * 1.86 the spongy bone, because the holes are not for the most part direct, but crooked and oblique like the pores of a sponge.

It is placed in the forepart of the Skull without the meninges and occupieth almost all

[illustration]

Tab. 5. Fig. 12. sheweth the inside of the wedg and spongy bones. Fig. 13. Two portions of the bones of the Sinciput a little disioyned the one from the other, that the frame of the Suturemight be better perceiued. Fig. 14. sheweth a part of the bone sinciput di∣uided with a saw from the rest of the same bone, the better to exhibite the substance of the Scull.

[illustration]

TABVLA. V.

[illustration]

FIG XII

• A A. The spongy or the eight bone.
• B. A bridge or partition diuiding the Or∣ganes of smelling.
• C. D. Two cauities of the wedge bone.
• E. A partition distinguishing them asunder.
• F. A hole of one of the Cauities ending in the Nostrils.
• G. A right Cauity scituated vnder the two former.
• H H. Processes like to Bats wings.
• a b 14. The vpper or exterior Table a, the interiour o.
• c 14. A cauernouse or spongy substance in the middest betwixt them called Diplois.

[illustration]

XIII

[illustration]

XIV.

the cauity of the nose; it is ioyned to the middest of the bottome of the forehead bone, [Tab. 4, fig. 10, ^•] and is distinguished from the wedge bone by the a bastard seame called a Harmony, which is accounted for the ninth Suture. [Tab. 4, fig. 10, aboue ^u] There are foure parts of this bone. The first is an vpper processe in themidst, long & triangular like a Cocks combe. The second is on both sides that processe [Tab. 4, fig. 10 ^{K I}. Tab. 5, fig. 12, ^AA] which is couered with a thinne Membrane likewise perforated. The third is a lower processe op∣posite to the vpper which diuideth the vpper part of the nose into two parts. The fourth part is the substance itselfe of the sponge from whence it hath his name. The vse of it is to admit aer for the generation of Animall spirits, to admit vapours to the sense of smel∣ling; * 1.87 but the pores of it are not direct but oblique and crooked least the cold ayer should too directly ascend vnto the braine to refrigerate or coole it ouermuch.

CHAP. VII. Of the Meninges or Membranes of the Braine.

AS the lower belly and parts therein are compassed with the Peritonaeum, & the middle with the Pleura, so there are two membranes stretched ouer the caui∣ty of the Skull, which Galen and those who haue written since his time haue * 1.88 called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. And indeed Galen had the name out of Hippocrates his book de Carnibus, who there taketh it in a larger signification, which giueth

that name to all parts that are hollow, as the veines, the stomacke the guts and such like. E∣rasistratus called these membranes 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Pollux 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The Arabians called them * 1.89 Matres the Mothers, and so now they are commonly tearmed. Macrobius calleth them O∣menta or kelles. The one of these which is the outward is thicke and called dura mater the hard Mother, the other inward and thinne called Pia mater, the deere or neere Mother, be∣cause it immediately incompasseth and imbraceth the substance of the braine.

* 1.90 The thicke meninx Hippocrates (in his booke de locis in homine) calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Galen 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, the thicke hard or skinny meninx, com∣monly the dura mater, because of all the membranes of the body it is the thickest, hardest and strongest, and particularly in relation to the thinner meninx.

In figure and magnitude this membrane answereth the bones of the Scull, because it in∣compasseth all his bosomes and cauities. It is greater then the Pia mater or thinner me∣ninx * 1.91 least if it lay to close vnto it the vessels that run therin should be compressed, which if they be distended and swell too full of bloud, do cause the head-ach yea oftentimes the Apoplexie; whence it is that many which dye of the Apoplexie, auoid bloud out of their nose and their mouth.

It is tyed very strongly to the Basis of the Scull and to his sharper processes, and to the orbes or circles of his holes, [Tab. 11, fig. 7, ^ZZ] whereupon some haue thought that from * 1.92 this Basis it tooke his originall, because seede is the matter out of which this, as all other membranes are made. Notwithstanding it cleaueth not so close to that bosome of the wedge bone [Tab. 4, fig. 10 ^•,] where the Glandule of phelgme is scituated, [Tab. 7, fig. 15, ^A] nor yet at the sides thereof where those bosomes are which giue way to the branches of the sleepy arteries called Carotides. It incompasseth all the inside of the Scull, from which as also from the braine it hangeth in the like distance as doth the Pericardiū or purse from the heart, least the eleuation and depression, or the Systole and Dyastole of the braine should be hindred. I knowfull well (that we may say something of it by the way) that Platerus thought that the braine it selfe did not moue, but that it was onely the pulsation * 1.93 of the third ventricle much like the beating of an artery, which we feele in the Sculs of ten∣der Infants before their bones are ioyned close together. But Columbus and Archange∣lus doe demonstrate a manifest Systole and Dyastole of the braine from their experience in those whose Sculs are wounded and the bones taken out with a Trepan. And Laurentius thinketh him not worthy the name of an Anatomist that will call it into question.

It is tied very strongly to the Scull by thinne and membranous fibres (which Galen in the 8. booke of the vse of parts and the 9. chapter calleth Ligaments) arising there-from, which passe through the Sutures of the Scull, especially about the Lambdal Suture, euery one of which Ligaments or fibrous ties chuse you whether, are extended ouer the part of the Scull where against they issue, and running along are exactly vnited together & make that common Membrane which we saide before was called Pericranium, vnder which there is yet another farre finer and thinner called Periostium; from which two membranes all the other membranes of the body haue their origninall, that in this respect this Dura meninx may well be called Mater, as being the Mother of all other membranes. It is also knit to the Pia mater and to the braine by the mediation of vessels. [Tab. 6, fig. 2, ^{DD GG}. Tab. 11, fig. 8, ^KK.]

This membrane is double as are the rest of the membranes of the body; and Columbus makes two membranes of it, one inward another outward, and boasts himselfe of the fin∣ding * 1.94 of them: whom Laurentius closely taxeth confessing that it is indeed double, but they are not therfore to be called two membranes; so saith he, we do not say that there are two rims of the belly, and yet we know that the Peritonaeum is double. Well, it hath a double superficies or surface; the outward like abroad Tendon is stretched ouer the other and groweth vnto it; hard it is and rough, partly by reason of the fibres which if you take away a piece of the Scull you may perceiue a little to swell vp like a small line, [Tab. 6, fig. 1, ^GGG, ^HH, ^II,] partly because in the crowne of the head where the sagitall Suture meeteth with the Coronall, there are certaine smal knubs or knots, which in the Scull haue their proper bo∣somes wherein they conch and to which they grow very fast. [Tab. 6, fig. 1, ^K.]

The inner superficies or surface is bright, smooth, slippery and much whiter without a∣ny such knubby or kernelly substance or fat (what you will call it) at all; moistened also with a watery humor, [tab. 6, fig. 2, ^HH] whereas the vtter is dryer. On the inside also it is of ex∣quisite sense, but on the outside not so that it might better endure the contaction of the

[illustration]

Tab. 6. Fig. 1. sheweth a head, the Scull being taken away that so the braine may appeare as it is couered with the Dura meninx.

[illustration]

Fig. 2. sheweth the Braine cleared from the Dura meninx, to∣gether with the third Sinus thereof, diuided through the middest, which is shewed couered with the Pia mater.

[illustration]

TABVLA. VI.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

• A A. B B. The Dura meninx or thicke mem∣brane.
• C C C. The third Sinus of this membrane.
• D D, The course of the veines as they run through the membrane, or the second veine of the braine.
• E E, The fift veine of the braine.
• F F F, Certaine small veines which perforate the Scull and reach to the pericranium or Scull-skin.
• G G G. Fibres of the Dura meninx passing through the Coronall Suture which fibres make the Pericranium.
• H H. Fibres passing through the sagittall Suture.
• I I. Others passing through the Lambdall Suture.
• K. A knub which vseth to grow to the Sinus of the Scull.
• L. A cauity in the forehead bone.
• M. The Scull.
• N. The Pericranium or Scull-skinne.

[illustration]

II.

[illustration]

Fig. 2.

• A A A. A part of the Crasse meninx diuiding the braine.
• B B. the third Sinus of the same Crasse mem∣brane opened.
• C C. the beginnings of the vessels out of the third Sinus into the Pia mater.
• D D D. the propagation or branching of these vessels.
• E E E. the Pia mater or thin meninx imme∣diately compassing the braine.
• F F F. Certaine vessels running through the conuolutions or breaches of the braine.
• G G G. Certaine branches of veines run∣ning through the sides of the dura meninx.
• H H H. The thicke membrane reflected downeward.

bone without offence.

It hath many holes or passages in it, first of all (saith Galen in his 9. booke of the vse of * 1.95 parts, and the 6. chapter; to giue way to many veines; againe, for the outgate of the Con∣iugations or paires of the sinewes. Moreouer in the middest it hath one notable perfora∣tion and that round, to let out the braine Tunnell, called Insundibulum, [tab. 12, fig. 11, ^F] as also others at the sides of the former to admit the sleepy arteries called Carotides, [Tab. 12, fig. 11, ^C and ^D] and one larger then all the rest through which the marrow of the backe descendeth out of the braine. [Tab. 12, fig. 9, ^H] Finally, where it is stretched ouer the spon∣gybone, it is perforated manifold like a Siue. [Tab. 14, figure 18, at ^F and figure 9, at ^•]

In the top of the head it is redoubled and separateth the braine into two parts, a right * 1.96 and a left, euen as low as the center thereof. [Tab. 10, fig. 13, from ^D to ^B] Which Redu∣plication

lyeth all along the third bosome or Sinus of this hard membrane & runneth with the bosome through the length of the head forward vnto the top of the nose, and groweth fast vnto the distinction of the mamillary processes, [Tab. 9, fig. 3, ^N] euen as it groweth backward in the middest to the hinder processe.

This Reduplication of the dura meninx is called the vpper processe and is likened by * 1.97 all the best Anatomists to a Mowers Sythe; and Laurentius is not affraide to call it Faix or the Sythe, and saith that this reduplication makes the body of the same: but Vesalius saith that the processe which is like a Sythe is not duplicated but simple as the membrane it selfe is simple, and seemeth onely to be double because of the bosome which parteth the braine; of the same minde also is Platerus. But let vs see how it resembleth a Sythe: Bau∣hine fashioneth it thus. Backward, (where it is continuall with a part of the same membrane which couereth the Cerebellum or after-braine) it is broad and answereth the broad end of the Sythe, [tab. 9, fig. 3, at ^D] about the midst of his length it groweth to be very thicke like the backe of the Sythe, and the fore end is like the point; for it groweth narrow by de∣grees and therefore that part of it which is next to the braine turneth inward obliquely iust like the hooking point of a Sythe. [tab. 9, fig. 3, from ^FG to ^H]

The other processe of the Dura mater is backward and shorter, and for the most part di∣stinguisheth the Cerebellum or after-braine from the braine it selfe, [Tab. 11, fig. 7, ^OOOO] Be∣side * 1.98 it couereth the Cerebellum, and it is foure-fold as thicke and hard as it is in any other place saith Columbus and with him Archangelus and Laurentius, Vesalius saith three-folde Dogges in this place haue a bone which vnderproppeth the braine that it should not lye * 1.99 heauy or beare vpon the Cerebellum. [Tab. 11, fig. 7, betwixt^OO and ^XX]

In this membrane there are found two kinds of Canales or pipes; one through which * 1.100 the vessels are carried, as the Arteries which are disseminated through the membrane. The other into which the veines do determine, which kinde of Canale or hollow passage is to it instead of veines; and these they call the backward bosomes, or hollownesses, or canales, (for other words to expresse a Sinus I cannot deuise) of which wee will immediately in∣treate.

Fallopius in his obseruations reckoneth ten of these Sinus, on either side foure; the ninth is that which other Anatomists take for the third, & the tenth that they take for the fourth; * 1.101 but in his institutions he reckoneth but sixe: foure of which we know well, the other two saith Bauhine, I thinke no man knowes but himselfe.

We with Bauhine (whom for the most part we follow) do reckon foure, which Galen in the ninth booke de Anatomicis Administrationibus called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in the 9. booke de vsu part. * 1.102 and the 6. chap. sometimes meningis 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 leading bloud: sometimes 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the ventricles of the thicke membrane; as in his 9. booke de Anatomicis Administrati∣onibus and the first chapter, because they arise from the duplication of the membrane, and are as it were Rillets carrying bloud and spirits. And haply hence tooke Pelops the occasion of his error, who auouched that all the vessels had their originall from the head.

* 1.103 The two first of these Sinus or Canels, or Rillets, (call them as you please) haue their be∣ginning behind in the Basis of the Occipitium or nowle betwixt the braine and the after-braine at the sides of the hole through which the marrow of the backe descendeth: they are one on each side, [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^MN] called the right and the left. They lye neere the sides of the Lābdall Suture, and into them do the veines and the arteries exonerate & vn∣burden themselues. They are fastened to the Scull, and when they come neere the middle of the Lābdall Suture & the top of the Cerebellum they ioyne in one and make a common cauity, which place [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^O] Herophylus (saith Galen in his 9. book of the vse of parts and the 6. chapter, and in the 9. of his Anatomicall Administrations and the first) called * 1.104 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is, Torcular the Presse, because from thence as from a high place the Rils runne * 1.105 downe on eyther side; some of them out of the middest of it are deriued into the whole after-braine, others run from the forepart, from whence, as wine from a grape-presse, the bloud poured out of the veines and arteries is squeesed into the whole braine. From these on eyther hand at the sides runne small branches like veines, some of them as small as a ve∣ry haire, some of them larger, [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^SS] which runne out into the bordering mē∣branes, both the thicke one [Tab. 11, fig. 7, ^OOO] and the thin one [Tab. 12, fig. 9, ^•D] where they couer the whole Cerebellum.

Out of the concurrence of these [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^O] do arise two other Sinus or Rils diffe∣ring in length and in the fashion of their cauities. The one of them is the higher and is

called the third Sinus [Table 15. figure 13. ^PP] the other lower called the fourth [table 7. fig. 13. ^R]

The third Sinus which is like a Rill of bloud, called sometimes by Galen a veine and not vnproperly (for what should you call a vessell in which bloud is contained but a veine * 1.106 though it haue not the coate of a veine) though some thinke it to be Herophilus his presse of which we spake euen now; it passeth directly forward through the length of the head [table 6. fig. 1. and 2. CCC] betwixt the right and the left parts of the Braine vnder the vpper part of the Lambdall Suture and vnder the Sagitall Suture, and vnder the middest of the forehead bone in the top of the nose is ioyned to the bony partition [tab. 7. fig. 13. ^Q] of the organs of smelling, and would be like a triangle, sauing that in the vpper part it is some what neere to a semicircular form: for the cauity of this Sinus, as also of the two former, haue two croo∣ked ribs as it were inward, and the third curued outward.

From this Sinus or canale on either side the braine all along the head there arise very * 1.107 thicke certaine vessels as it were branches out of a great trunke of a veine which Galen cal∣leth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, of which some are but small which they call venas reptitias, the creeping veines. Of these some arise from the higher part of the Sinus, some from the lower, some from the sides thereof. Those which arise out of the higher part [Table 7. figure 13. XXX] which is next the skull, do run vpward to the duplication of the skull, that is to the porie substance between the tables thereof, and to the Perteranium, and mingle themselues with those small vesselles which descend from the skinne of the crowne and passe through the skull at small pores thrilled therein for the same purpose. Those which arise from the lower part of the canale, that is, which is next the braine [table 7. figure 13. VVV table 9. figure 3. ^E•. ^HH] are but small, and runne downeward onely into that part of the dura meninx which euen nowe we called the sithe. Those which arise out of the sides of the Sinus, that is out of the bredth of it [table 7. figure 13. ^TTT tab. 8. figure 2. ^DDFF] are infinitely diuersified into the piae mater and together therewith into the conuolutions of the brain; and where the piae mater endeth they proceed on into the very substance it selfe of the braine. These vessels sometimes ope∣ning, * 1.108 so great a quantity of bloud hath issued by the Nosethrils, that it is credibly reported to haue amounted to 24. pound: in which kinde of fluxe wee must not apply medicines to the forehead, but either to the crowne or to the coronall suture.

Columbus was of opinion that these vessels do not arise out of the Sinus it selfe, but out * 1.109 of the veines running therin, for he thought that the internal iugular veines passed through it. Archangelus also seemeth to incline this way, who sayth that through the two former Sinus or rils, the inner iugular veines and arteries doe passe and infinuate themselues into the third Sinus and so run out to the nose, yea backward also to the fourth Sinus and quite through it.

The fourth Sinus sayth Vesalius the professors of diffection haue not remembred. It is * 1.110 no where neare vnto the skull as the others are, but seated in the lower part of the braine: very short it is and runneth directly betwixt the brayne and the after-brayne to that part of the braine called Nates or the bottocks, and the glandule called pinealis (for such represen∣tations there are in the substance of the braine [table 7. figure 13. ^R table 11. figure 7. ^T] and the cauity of it is like a triangle made of three equall ribs curued inward. The beginning of this cautiy, or rather trueth to say the meeting of all foure [Tab. 7. fig. 13. ^O] some call the Torcular or the presse; and from hence do spring the veines, sayth Columbus and with him Bauhine, which are dispersed through the substance of the braine to nourish it.

From this Sinus also in his progresse doe issue small branches, some of which runne vp∣ward * 1.111 to that part of the dura mater which is aboue the Corebellum and as far as to the sithe, [table 7. figure 13. ^YY] others downward [tab. 7. fig. 13. ^aa] which are dispersed into the du∣ra mater, where it lyeth aboue the after-brain, as also into the pia mater, both where it com∣passeth * 1.112 the after-braine and the braine it selfe.

Afterward this Sinus is deuided into diuers rillets; two issue out of the vpper part of it and one out of the lower; of the two which issue out of the vpper part, one is greater ano∣ther lesse.

The greater [table 7. figure 13. ^b] creepeth along the lower part of the dura meninx where it deuideth the braine in his length; from which certaine surcles runne [Table 7. fig. 13. ^ccc] vpward to the processe of the same dura mater.

The lesser which is double, a right and a left [table 7. figure 13. ^de table 3. figure 3. ^IIFGG] supported with the thinne membrane after the manner of veines are ledde through the

length of the braine on either side aboue the callous body called Corpus callosum, and afford some small twigs to the piamater which are distributed on either side into the braine.

The lower rillet [table 7. figure 13. ^f] is but one propagated into that part of the piama∣ter which compasseth the Cerebellum; but it is diuided into two branches, one of them run∣neth

[illustration]

TABVLA VII.

[illustration]

FIG. XIII.

[illustration]

Table. 7. Figure 13. exhibiteth the vesselles of the Braine and their distribution, especially through the right side, whither they proceede from the internall iugular veine, or from the sleepie Arterie, or from the sinus of the Dura Meninx.

[illustration]

XIV.

[illustration]

Figure, 14. sheweth the wonderful Net as Galen describeth it.

[illustration]

XV

[illustration]

Figure 15. sheweth the pituitary Glandule with the Bason and the sleepy Arteries.

[illustration]

XVI.

[illustration]

Figure 16. sheweth the Rete-mirabile or wonderfull Net, to∣gether with the glandule as it is found in the heads of Calues and Oxen.

• A. The internall Iugular veine.
• B. The sleepy or Iugular artery,
• C. the first veine.
• D. the 2 veine which is led vnto the Sinus.
• E, the 3, creeping through the dura meninx
• F, the fourth running into the Sinus.
• G H, the 5 and 6 going to the dura meninx.
• I, the first Artery.
• Φ A braunch of the same Artery running through the Muscles of the necke.
• K, the second artery reching into the sinus
• L, the third without a companion.
• r A small branch of the third Artery.
• M, N, the 1 & 2 sinus of the Dura Meninx.
• O, the congresse or meeting of both those sinus. PP, the 3 sinus of the Dura Meninx
• Q, The end thereof.
• R, the fourth sinus of the Dura meninx.
• SS, Branches of the first Sinus deriued into the Membranes neere at hand.
• TTTT, Branches of the third Sinus disper∣sed into the Pia Meninx.
• V V, the lower smal branches of the 3. sinus
• X X, the vpper, distributed through the Du∣ra meninx.
• Y Y, certain surcles of the 4 Sinus sent vp∣ward. aa, Others sent downward.
• b, the vpper passage of the fourth Sinus running by the Syth.
• cc, Surcles runing vpward from this passage
• de, the right & left vpper branches of the fourth Sinus. f, The lower branch going to the Piamater.
• g, A branch of the same pas. going forward
• h, The same bending backewarde to the Choroides reflected to the Corebellum.
• i, A notable vessell into the which the 4. Sinus doth determine.
• K the vpper. The by-partition of this vessel in the braine.
• l, m, Two branches of this by-partition.
• n. A surcle reching to the organ of hearing
• ooo, the distribution of the 3 vein & artery,
• ppp, Surcles proceeding from the Brāches marked with o deriued into the pia mater
• 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, The diuision of the third artery where it entreth into the scull. s. A braunch reaching to the hollownes of the nostrils
• t, the end of this in the extreamity of the vessel. uu, 2 branches entring into the scul
• x. A branch deriued vnto the eie from the coition or meeting of the branches uu,
• e, A branch attaining to the pia mater.
• A, A brāch attaining to the right ventricle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 The complication of vessels called Plexus Choroides formed on either side of the branch marked with A. Fig. 14, A, B, Arteries climbing into the scull, and making this wonderful net. C D, Branches into which the surcles of that net are ioyned. E, the pituitaryglandule or kernel of flegm Fig: 15. A, the Glandule receiuing the bason. B, the bason it selfe, or if you wil, the Tunnel called Peluis or insundibulum. C C, the sleepy Arteries. D, A branch of the artery going to the side of the Dura Meninx. E, Another branch of the same artery going to the nostrils. FF, An artery in one side diuided into 2 bran∣ches, but in the other side meeting togither againe. G. A partition of the artery creeping through the du∣ra meninx, H, Another branch which getteth out of the scull and reacheth to the eies. Figure 16, A The petuitary Glandule. B, C. The sleepy Arteries going into the scull. D, D. The wonderfull Net.

forward [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^g] through the Circles of the braine and endeth in the lower seate of the ventricle, & is ioyned with an artery ascending thither [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^y] to make as they say that web of vessels which they cal Plexus Choroides, because it is somewhat like the after-birth called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The other branch is reflected backeward to the Cerebellum [tab 7, fig. 13, ⁱ] & is diuersly sprinkled into his pia mater. Finally, and at length this fourth sinus, * 1.113 determineth into a notable vessell couered with the pia mater [Ta. 11, fig: 7 ^v. tab: 7, fig. 13 ⁱ] which neere the testicles of the brain, so called, is diuersly diuided and knotted & so goeth vnto the Glandule called Pinealis and vnder the arch of the brain called Fornix runneth in∣to the inside of the third ventricle & there is parted into a right branch & a left. The right branch reaching [tab, 7, fig. 13 ^l,] vnto the right ventricle and the lefte vnto the left. [Tab. 7, fi. 13 ^m] & Anatomists do think that they are mingled & ioynd to the branches of the first and fourth arteries to make that plexus choroides of which we made mention euen now.

These sinus or cauities of the dura meninx haue not the coats of veins but are in substance like to the Meninx itselfe. For as soone as the veine (put case the internall iugular) touch∣eth * 1.114 the scul, the dura meninx is there presently duplicated & the inside becommeth fistula∣ted or hollowed like a pipe, & with these pipes as if they were veines the veines themselues are ioyned. They do the office both of veines and arteries, for they beate like arteries sayth Platerus, they receiue into them both veines and arteries (although Fallopius thinke they re∣ceiue only veines) and the blood and spirits of them both. For they are full of blood which * 1.115 they preserue as they receiue it full of spirites, but after death this bloode cloddeth into a grainy substance, haply because the bloode they receiue out of the vessels is a little thicker then ordinary saith Bauhine. They send also out of themselues scions and surcles like to the branches of Veines which passe vnto the Braine and both the Meninges.

For because the Braine is large and standeth in neede of a great quantity of blood, but * 1.116 yet cannot admit any notable branches of Veines and Arteries to runne thorough his sub∣stance, Nature made these sinus or rillets to be in stead of veines and arteries to passe tho∣rough and irrigate or water the whole substance thereof: for into them there is continu∣ally powred great abundance of blood which is mingled, the Venall I meane with the Ar∣teriall, and afterward conneyed by these pipes vnto the convolutions of the Brain, yea in∣to his very substance, aswel forhis nourishment and life as also for the generation of the A∣nimal spirits which are wrought within his substance. For seeing these Animall spirits are continually supplyed vnto the instruments of sense and motion, and by motion are spent & dissipated, it was necessary there should be great quantity of both kinds of bloode in this place mingled together to make supply of them.

The vse of the Dura Meninx is, to hold together the whole substance of the Brain and be * 1.117 a couering thereunto and to all the parts of it, for it compasseth about the spinall marrow also, yea and all the Nerues that yssue out of the Braine. It also defendeth the brain from the impressions of the Scull or compressions if by any outward iniury it be beaten down∣ward. It also preserueth the Arteries which runne in the surface of the Brain, that in their Diastole they be not offended by the hardnesse of the Scull.

Moreouer, it diuideth the Braine from the after-braine or Cerebellum, as also the braine itself into a right part & a left. Finally, it produceth Ligaments through the sutures of the scull to make the Pericranium and to fasten it to the scull, that it might not sinke downe to∣ward the braine, as also to hold vp the braine it selfe least setling down it should compresse the Ventricles which would cause sudden death. And thus much concerning the dura ma∣ter or Meninx, wherein we haue beene somewhat prolixe, that nothing might escape wor∣thy your obseruation. Now it followeth that we entreate of the Pia Mater or thin Meninx. The Dura mater being taken away we meete with the second Membrane called Pia mater, * 1.118 delineated vnto you in the sixt Table and the second Figure, but in the ninth Table & the third Figure ^{P P} sheweth the Dura Mater and ^{O O} the Pia Mater of which we now speake. This Membrane euen considered of it selfe, as also in comparison with the other Membranes of the body is exceeding thin, and therefore called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by Galen in his ninth booke de Administrationibus Anatomicis and the second Chapter. The name he had out of Hippo∣pocrates * 1.119 his Booke of the Falling sicknesse, where he saith that this 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 diuideth the middle of the Braine, or the Braine in the middest. Galen also in his eight Booke of the vse of parts and the ninth chapter calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is the Membrane like the secun∣dine or after birth, because it conteyneth or holdeth fast the veins and arteries of the brain, least whilst they mooue they should be displaced, their basis or foundation being but weak and infirme.

This membrane is for the most part conteyned within the skull immediatly couering the brain and there is iust of his figure. In magnitude answerable to the braine & the parts * 1.120 thereof; but the substance or body of it is exceeding thinne and sine, and yet Cabrolius and Laurentius say it is double. It is thinne that it might more easily insinuate it selfe into the * 1.121 conuolutions of the braine, and yet not be offensiue by the waight of it to the brayne vpon which it lieth, and beside to carry the vessell quite through the same [tab. 6. fig. 2.^••• table 9. figure 3^OO.] It is soft and of exquisite sence because it communicateth the Tactiue vertue to the Brayne and the Nerues; and Archangelus sayeth it is the very instrument of Tou∣ching.

This Nature placed betweene the brayne and the dura meninx, least the braine sayth Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 9. Chapter should be offended by so hard a * 1.122 neighbour. For euen as sayth Plato betweene the earth and the fire because their natures are very contrary, God interposed the water and the ayre, so Galen sayeth that Nature be∣twixt the brayn and the skull which are partes of very different substance hath placed these 2. membranes or minninges. For it there had been none but this thin pia mater it could not haue agreed with the skull without offence, if there had beene none but the dura meninx; yet the braine would haue beene therewith offended. That therefore neither the braine nor his couer should endure any vncouth violence, Nature hath immediately couered the Braine with this pia mater; and then the pia mater hath she compassed with the thicker; for by how much the thicker is softer then the bone, by so much is the braine softer then the thinner.

If you would know what distance there is betweene these two membranes, you must make a little hole in the thicker, and then put a hollow bugle to it and blow it and you shal perceiue that the distance between them will containe a great deale of ayre, by which you may imagine how farre they were seuered when the man was aliue.

This membrane doth not onely cleane closely to the braine and couer it immediatly as * 1.123 his naturall coate, as a mother embraceth her infant (whence Platerus thinketh it was cal∣led pia mater) least the soft and moyst substance thereof should be seuered by the continual motion wherwith it is wrought vp and down (for we perceiue that the brain wil easily run abroad when it is taken away) but also it insinuateth it selfe into the bottome of the braine, and extendeth it selfe vnto the inside of the cauity of his ventricles saith Galen in his 8. book of the Vse of parts and the 8. chapter, lining them round within. The vulgar Anatomistes sayth Laurentius thinke that it passeth into the ventricles from the vpper part of the brayn; but the truth is that it ascendeth from below where the Infūdibulum or Tunnel of the brain is scituate, and where those small arteries deriued from the sleepy arteries called Carotides do passe into the brain at the sides of the wedge-bone; so that euen in the bottom it mee∣teth; without the skull it cloatheth the marrow of the backe and the nerues. The bones also sayth Archangelus doe seeme to bee couered with this thinne membrane, which nowe * 1.124 hauing with his vse changed his name is called Periostium. But how it maketh the Infundi∣bulum or Tunnell called also Peluis the Bason, and how it inuesteth the vpper part of the phlegme-glandule, we shall declare afterward.

The Vse of it is, to couer and establish the braine, the after-brain, the marrow of the spine and the nerues, as also all the vesselles which runne through it, it knitteth together, * 1.125 so that they are more safely and commodiously distributed through the whole body of the Brayne and through all his partes. Adde hereto that which Archangelus determineth in the first Booke of his Anatomy, that it is the most exquisite and proper instrument of the sence of Touching.

CHAP. VIII. Of the vessels disseminated through the Brayne.

THE vessels disseminated through the Braine are Veines and Arteries and those Sinus or Canalles whereof wee intreated at large in the former Chap∣ter.

The Veines are braunches of the inner or vtter Iugulars: the Arteries * 1.126 of the Carotides or sleepy Arteries, and of that we call Ceruicales or the artery of the necke.

The inner Iugular at the Basis of the skull in the backpart [table 7. figure 13. at^Λ] is de∣uided into two brāches, one bigger which watereth the backpart, & another smaller bran∣ching * 1.127

forward. The bigger [Tab. 7, fig. 13, the lower^c] attaineth into the braine at the first hole of thr Nowle-bone. [Tab. 4. fig. 10,^b] The lesser, [Tab. 6, fig. 1,^DD] getteth into the braine at the seauenth hole of the wedge-bone. [Tab. 4, fig. 10,^R]

The vtter Iugular veine sendeth three branches into the Scull: the first [Tab. 7, fig. 13,^B] * 1.128 entreth into the Sinus of the dura meninx through the hole of the temple bones. [Tab. 4, fig. 10,^C] The second [Tab. 7, fig. 13.^G. Tab. 14, fig. 19,^HH] passeth in at the second hole of the wedge-bone. [Tab 4, fig. 10.^G] The third [Tab. 7, fig. 13,^H. Tab. 14, fig. 19,^II] is distribu∣ted into the dura meninx, and getteth in at the hole of the spongy bone.

[illustration]

FIG. XIII.

[illustration]

XIV.

[illustration]

XV

[illustration]

XVI.

Beside these fiue veins, Vesa∣lius * 1.129 and Platerus add another, to wit, the end of the Necke veine which entreth the Scul (say they) at the third hole of the Nowle bone which was purposely made for it. But Bauhine could neuer obserue it; yet wee haue added it in the Table. [Tab. 7, fig. 13,^D.] Thus much of the veins, now of the arteries.

The sleepy artery called * 1.130 Carotis whē it is come on ei∣ther side to the Chops is di∣uided into two branches, one exterior of which heereafter, the other interior which is the larger of the twain. This at the Basis of the Scull [tab. 7, fig. 13,^B] is diuided into 2. vnaequall branches. The first is a little lesse then the Trunke, * 1.131 [tab. 7, fig. 13, ^L. fig. 15, ^CC. tab▪ 14, fig. 19,^P] pierceth the Scull through a proper hole of his owne thrilled in the temple∣bone, passeth vnto the saddle of the wedge bone and then sheaddeth a branch on each hand into the side of the dura mater, [tab 7, fig. 15,^D] and af∣terward being diuersly carri∣ed and diuided (as wee shall heare more distinctly in the booke of veines) it helpeth to make the Rete mirabile. [tab. 7, fig. 14] and the Plexus Choroides. From this first issueth a branch obliquely, [tab. 7, fig. 13,^q] and getteth into the braine at the second hole of the * 1.132 temple-bone, and then is diuided into two branches, the one running outward [tab. 7, fig. 13,^s] through the eight hole of the wedgebone into the cauity of the Nose: [tab. 7, fig. 15,^•] the other inward, which is diuided into two, [tab. 7, fig. 13,^uu] and after distributed in∣to the Dura Meninx; and this is called the second artery, though it arise out of the first.

The third artery [Tab. 7, fig. 13,^I] is the other branch of the inner trunke of the Carotis, * 1.133 much lesse then the first; getteth in at the first hole of the nowle-bone, [Tab. 4, fig. 10,^b] and so passeth into the Sinus of the dura meninx.

There is also one other artery called Ceruicalis which is a sprout of the axillary artery, it * 1.134 perforateth the dura meninx in the side where it inuesteth the spinall marrow and entreth the Scull at the same large hole whereout the marrow issueth, and ascendeth vnto the place of the Glandule called pituitaria where it is diuided into two branches, which helpe to accomplish the Plexus Choroides.

Beside these veines and arteries; the Sinus of the dura meninx is also a vessell of the brain which we haue at large discribed before. It receiueth three veines, [Tab. 7, fig. 13, ^CDE] and * 1.135 two arteries [^IK] which vnburthen themselues into it: and this Sinus according to his di∣uers course is distinguished into foure as you haue heard, which are larger then the veines that ascend vnto the Scull but not round as they are, but rather like a triangle consisting of three ribs of an equall length and curued somewhat inward. From these do issue certaine passages like vnto veines, by which both sorts of bloud Naturall and Vitall, is distributed into the substance of the braine as we haue said before.

The vse of the veines is three-fold, first to bring plentifull nourishment to the braine. The second, to bring a Natural influent spirit from the Liuer to nourish the ingenit Natu∣rall * 1.136 spirit of the braine.

The third, together with the Naturall spirit to bring the Vegetable soule or power into the braine.

The vse of the arteries is to bring vitall spirits and facultie to cherish the vitall spirit of the braine, to ventilate the in-bred heate of the braine, to moue the bloud in the veines * 1.137 which otherwise would putrifie: And finally to make the bloud of the veines which is thic∣ker heere then ordinary as we haue already obserued, somewhat thinner that it might passe and repasse more freely.

And thus much shall suffice concerning the containing parts of the head both outward and inward, common and proper, with their appurtenances the vessels. Now it is time we should come vnto the parts contained, which are the braine and the after-braine, with the spinall marrow and Nerues arising there from: and first of the braine it selfe.

CHAP. IX. Of the Excellency, Scituation, Figure, Substance, and Tem∣perament of the Braine.

BEing to vndertake the history of the braine, me thinkes we may make a diuisi∣on of those parts that belong vnto & fall vnder our sense into foure sorts. One sort of them that are about the braine as the containing parts already spoken of outward and inward, common and proper. Another sort of them that are within the braine as the substance thereof, the figure, the magnitude and the diuers parts which haue diuers names giuen them according to their different formes, * 1.138 of which we will heere and heereafter intreate. A third sort of them that ascend vnto the braine, as the veines and arteries, of which we spake somewhat in the former chapter, and shall do more if God permit in the booke of vessels. A fourth and last sort of them which issue from the braine as the marrow of the backe or spine, the Nerues and the Animal spirit of which also we shall presently heereafter discourse: But to the purpose.

Aristotle (in his 2. booke de partibus Anamalium and the 7. chapter, and in the first book of his History of Creatures, and the 16. chapter) saith, that all Creatures which haue bloud, haue also a braine and none other, vnlesse it be somewhat proportionable as the Po∣lipus. * 1.139

This braine among the auncieut Greekes had no proper name, but because of the scitu∣ation it was called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 because it was contained 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in the head. Of the gene∣ration of it Hippocrates hath learnedly discoursed in his booke de Carnibus to which were∣ferre the learned Reader; as also for the order of the generation thereof to Aristotle in his booke de generatio e Animalium and the sixt Section.

It is the principall part of the whole body which may be proued by the scituation, the fi∣gure, the defences it hath, and the vse of it. The scituation is in the highest part of the * 1.140 body as it were in a defenced Tower, that it might bee better secured from outward iniu∣ries.

The figure is round, which is the most noble figure of all the rest, for it was propor∣tionable that the diuinest part should haue the most perfect and absolute figure.

The defences of the braine are very many, the haire, the skinne and that the thickest of all the body, the fatte, the fleshy Membrane, the Pericranium, the Periostium, a double tabled Scull and two Meminges or membranes, by all which it is of all sides defenced from * 1.141 violence, so that it cannot be hurt or offended but with extreame wrong. But neyther the heart nor any other part is so prouided for by Nature, wherefore it should seeme she made more of store, as we say, of it then of all the rest.

In respect of the vse it will easily carry away the prize of Excellency; for the soule * 1.142

of man saith Varolius, being not tyed to any bodily instrument cannot apprehend those out ward things which are without it selfe; vnlesse it be by the mediation of a corporeall organ into which the species or formes of materiall things may be transmitted by which afterward they may be exhibited, and in which they may be apprehended and contemplated: euen as * 1.143 he that is shut vp in a roome, cannot see those things which are, or are acted without, vnlesse there be some Tralucent body wherein the Images of those outward things may first be re∣ceiued and after represented to him that is within. Such an instrument is that which wee call Commune sensorium the common sence; for nothing can come into the vnderstanding vnlesse it be first in the sence.

Now this first or common sense according to Plato and Galen is the braine; (for Ari∣stotle * 1.144 did but dreame that it was the heart) and they thought well. For not onely Galen but Aristotle himselfe did resolue that that was the first Sensorium or common sence, which is * 1.145 the originall of sinewes. Nowe Anatomy teacheth vs that all the sinewes arise from the braine.

Hence then it is manifest that the Braine is the seate of the Sensatiue Soule; for if a nerue which is directed vnto any part be obstructed, that part is depriued of sence and motion & so of the sensatiue Soule. If the originall or beginning of the spinall marrow be obstructed all the parts vnder the head doe loose both sence and motion, when as yet the head enioy∣eth them both. But if the fourth ventricle of the Braine be obstructed, then not onely the whole bodie but the head it selfe looseth motion and sence, and is depriued of the sensatiue Soule.

Who then will deny that the Brayne is the most noble of all the members, seeing it is the seate of all the Animall faculties, Imagination, Reason or discourse & Memory (wher∣fore Aphrodisaeus called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 The Organ of wisedome) and the beginning or o∣riginall * 1.146 of sence and voluntary motion; and beside seeing from it doe issue and on it do de∣pend all the instruments of the senses of seeing, hearing, smelling, tasting, touching yea and speech also. And therefore Plato did worthily call it, because hee could giue it no higher a stile, * 1.147 The deuine Member. For what the Heauen is in the worlde, the same in man is the Braine. The Heauen is the habitation of the supreame Inteligence, that is of God; and the Braine the seate of the Soule, that is the demi-God of this Little-world.

Hence it was that Homer called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is the Heauen, because as from the Coelesti∣all * 1.148 influence all things below it are moued both in heauen and earth; so all the parts of the body haue sense and motion from the influence of the Braine.

Wherefore with Galen we determine that the Braine as well as the Heart is a Principall part: not that wee think, as some doe, that the Braine is the Prince and King of all the rest, no more then we thinke with Aristotle that the Heart is the most noble of all the parts. But * 1.149 we say that as the heart is of greatest and most instant necessity for life, so the place of dig∣nity belongeth to the Braine. Columbus giueth an elegant reason hereof taken from Gene∣ration.

The Liuer sayth hee is ingendred by the mediation and helpe of the vmbilicall veine, * 1.150 the heart by the mediation and helpe of the vmbilicall arteries, and these are ingendred by the vessels of the wombe: but the nerues which are the instruments of sence and motion doe immediatly arise out of the braine of the Infant.

The Braine is commonly called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Galen in his Book de motu musculorum, cal∣leth * 1.151 it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 The marrow of the head, for a difference betweene it and the marrow of the backe which is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and the marrow of the bones from which it much dif∣fereth, because it is not dissolued by fire, nor consumed in hunger, nor contained in the skull to nourish it. Wherefore Galen in his 8. Booke de vsu partium and the 4. Chapter putteth a difference betweene it and the marrow of the bones, because this is fluxible and like vnto fat, neither couered with coates nor wouen with vcines and arteries, neither hath any communion with the muscles and nerues, all which is contrary in the Braine.

Apollidorus thought that none of the Antients had giuen any name to the Brain in any * 1.152 of their writings, and that therefore Sophocles called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the white marrow; imita∣ting therein Plato, who when he would giue a name to the Brayne called it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and True Loue the Grecians say is 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, euen at the vppermost marrow or at the Brane of the Soule, no doubt because they thought that the Soule was in the Braine. * 1.153

It is scituate in the head as in a Castle most safe, because of the defences thereof be∣fore mentioned; as also because it is the highest place, & as it were the Tribunall or throne

of her body. For as God who is the parent yea the Creator of the Vniuerse is said to haue his seate and throne in heauen. So the Braine which is the pallace of the soule was wiselie seated in the height of the body, partly because of the eyes and eares, for their nerues be∣ing soft had neede also be as short as might be, and therefore placed neere vnto the brain. Now aboue they must necessarily be seated because they are the scout-watches of the Bo∣die to foresee and to heare of dangers before they come vpon vs.

The Figure of the Braine is answereable to the Figure of the Scull, not that it is fashio∣ned by the Scull, for if it had beene so, then the Scull shoulde haue bin formed before the * 1.154 Braine. Againe (saith Galen in his 8 Booke of the vse of parts and the 12 chapter) they that say that the Braine is fashioned by the Scull do not obserue that the Brain is manifestly se∣parated from the Dura Meninx, and that the Meninx it selfe although it touch the scul yet it adhereth not vnto it. It expresseth indeede in the surface of it the forme of the cauitie of the scull, and when it is rightly formed it is round and a little longer then globous, bee∣cause of the ventricles which were to be formed therein.

Forward it is somewhat narrower, backward broader and on either side lightly depres∣sed [Tab. 6, fig. 2 sheweth this] but in those that haue as we say Laesa principta, that is, in I deots it is often otherwise fashioned as we haue said before. But in the Basis it is vnequal & full of variety because the scull hath there diuers dens and bosoms, especially at the wedge∣bone [Tab. 14, fig. 19 betweene ^A and the latter^B] and the inward processe of the Temple∣bones. [Tab. 15, fig. 20, betweene H and N] But aboue all it swelleth out forward at the in∣struments of smelling, and produceth two teates as it were [Table: 14, fig: 19, ^CC] vvhich are therefore commonly named Mamillares processus. But where it coucheth vpon the Cere∣bellum or after-braine it is smooth and more equall. [Tab. 14, fig. 18, ^AA, ^BB]

Concerning the magnitude, the braine of a man (saith Aristotle in his 2 Booke de partibus Animalium and the 7 chapter in comparison and proportion with other creatures is the * 1.155 largest, so that the Braine of one man is more then three Oxen, first because in man there are many Animall functions which beasts haue not, and those that we haue common with beasts are in vs much more perfect. For being in man the instrument and organ of reason, it was necessary it should conteine yea and pertect also great plenty of spirits. Now many spirits cannot be made but of much blood, and aboundance of blood cannot be contey∣ned in a little body. Againe, it was fit that the braine should be large, moist, thick & glu∣tinous that they might not by reason of their notable tenuity vanish away but passe into the whole body by proper and peculiar channels framed for them.

But the magnitude in length, bredth and thicknesse is so great as the capacity of the scul is able to conteine, for together with his Membranes the Flegmaticke Glandule and the vessels that ascend vnto it; it filleth al his compasse [Tab. 6. fig. 1 and 2. Table. 9. fig. 3 and 4] before and behind, and on either side, only leauing so much distance as may suffice for his Diastole and Systole. Finally, it is so great saith Bauhine that in our dissections we haue found it weigh foure or fiue pounds; and Archangelus addeth fiue pound and a halfe; for the lar∣ger a man is the greater and more weighty is his braine, yea children because of the waight of their braine cannot of a long time carry their heads steddy vpon their shoulders.

It is knit by a common connexion of Veines, Arteries and Sinnewes with the rest of the * 1.156 parts, although more familiarly to the spinall marrowe and the sinnewes, because they are produced heere-from. Hence it is, that when the least or basest part of the body is pained the Braine also partaketh of the smart. As for supportation and strength it needed no assi∣stance from the other parts because it is so strongly fortified and as it were intrenched with in the scull.

The substance of the braine hath a double principle of which it is formed, the seede and the Mothers blood. Archangelus thinketh it hath no such principle, it may be he is of the * 1.157 opinion of Praxagoras and Philotimus of whom Galen maketh mention in his 8 book of the vse of parts and the 12 chapter, who thought that the braine was nothing else but a produ∣ction or propagation of the spinall marrow, and that was the reason why it is foulded vp in so many convolutions and revolutions. But this is an idle speculation of a vvandering Brain. We wil determine as is saide that it hath a double principle seed and blood, of which is generated a peculiar kinde of glandulous substance like whereunto there is none in the whole body, so that Aristotle exceeding well in his 2. Booke de part bus Antmalium and the * 1.158 7 chapter saide, that it was suigeneris of his owne kinde, intimating thereby, that there vvas no other kinde in the whole body whereunto it might fitly be referred. For because the in∣genit

functions of the Braine are peculiar vnto it alone as Vesalius hath well obserued, it was framed and fitted by Nature for the performance of those functions, of a peculiar sub∣stance * 1.159 and essentiall forme wherein the principall faculties of the soule, Iudgement, Ima∣gination, Reason and Memory might reside, and which they might vse as their proper in∣strument, and on which the rest of the senses might depend.

It is white, soft and very moist. White by reason of his spermaticall matter, for it is made * 1.160 of the purest part of the seed furnished with abundance of spirits, as also that the Animall spirits therein conteined should be cleare and bright, not muddy or otherwise coloured. Yet is not all his substance perfectly white, for that which is neerest to the convolutions [Tab. 9. fig. 4. Ta. 10, fig. 5 ^EF] is somwhat neerer to an Ash colour, as it is also in the Cere∣bellum; * 1.161 the reason whereof some thinke to be because there are so many small veines disse∣minated through it. For as we thinke the vialactea or Milky Way in heauen is occasioned by an infinite number of small starres which to vs are inuisible, but yet do giue a brightnes to that part of the sky; so though we cannot see how the veines do alter the colour in this place, yet seeing it is altered, it is very reasonable that the insensible membranes of the small veines giue that ashie colour vnto it. The rest of the Braine a little more inward is pure white [Tab. 9. fig. 4, ^GH. Tab. 10, fig. 5, ^G•. Tab. 11, fig. 7 and 8, ^••]

It is soft, and softer saith Galen in his 8. Booke de vsupartium and the sixt Chapter then the Cerebellum, because it is the originall of the soft Nerues pertaining to the Organes of * 1.162 sense, but the Cerebellum is the originall of the hard Nerues commonly thought to bee the Nerues of motion. In Children the Braine is so soft that it is fluid. The reason of the soft∣nesse is because it is to receiue all the species or representations of the outward senses, as also of the imagination and vnderstanding. For vnlesse the alteration or impression that is made in any of the senses do proceede first from the Braine and after returne againe vnto it, the creature hath sence of nothing; which is proued by the example of su••h as are taken with the Apopleixe. Wherfore seeing sensation is a passion, it was requisit that the braine should be of such a substance as is fit to receiue the impressions of other things. Yet it be∣hooued not it should be so soft as that the impressions made therein, should presently sink * 1.163 away and be obliterated, as it hapneth in water and other fluide bodies, but that it should haue with the softnes a kind of consistence of solidity, which solidity is so exquisitely min∣gled with the softnes, that the fire cannot melt it as it doeth fat or wax and such like. To conclude it is like the substance of a nerue, of which also his marrow is the originall, but a * 1.164 little softer: Hippocrates in his booke de Glandulis likneth it vnto a kernell, because as a kernel it is white and friable, and beside is of the same vse to the head that a glandule would bee, drawing vp the exhalations of the lower partes which after vapour out by the Sutures of the skull.

The Temperament of the brayne is cold and moyst, as wee may easily with Galen in * 1.165 the 8. booke of the Vse of parts conclude from the softnes and moystnes of his substance. Wherfore Hippocrates in his book de Carnibus, calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 the Metropolis or chiefe seate of cold and glutinous moisture. Glutinous to hold and conteine the subtile Animall spirits which otherwise would soone vanish and decay; and colde that the part ordained for the exercise of reason and therefore fulfilled with hot spirits should not easily be set on fire or enflamed. For when the braine by any accident or distemper growes hot as we see in phreniticall patients, the motions thereof are furious and raging, and the sleepe turbulent and vnquiet. And indeede the Heade is verie subiect (colde al∣though * 1.166 it be by nature) to hot distempers, partly because of the perpetuall motion thereof and of the spirits, partly by reason of the aboundant Veines and Arteries and great quanti∣ty of blood therein conteyned, and finally because whatsoeuer hot thing is in the body ei∣ther naturall or vnnaturall if it be inordinately mooued flieth vp vnto the braine, or at lest sendeth hot vapors vnto it.

CHAP. X. Of the Substance & parts of the Braine.

AS the Braine is the Originall and seate of all the Animall Facuties, so for the exercise of the same it hath diuerse and different parts cast into * 1.167 sundry moulds which we will now take view of according to Anatomi∣call Method, alwayes remembring that by the Braine wee vnderstande whatsoeuer is conteyned within the Scull and compassed about by the hard and thin Membranes.

The Braine therefore wee deuide into three parts. For first it is parted into a forepart * 1.168 and a hinde-part by the dura meninx quadruplicated or foure-foulded.

The forepart because it is the greater and most principall (for in it the Animall spirites * 1.169 are especially laboured) reteineth the name of the whole, and is properly called Cerebrum or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The hinder part is much lesser, and is called by a diminitiue word, Cerebellum we call it the After-braine. Herophilus as Galen witnesseth in his 8. book of the Vse of parts, and the 11. Chapter, calleth it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

Againe the forepart or the Braine, by the dura meninx duplicated and resembling a * 1.170 Mowers Sythe, is parted in the top throughout his whole length into two equall parts, one right another left. [tab. 8. fig. 2. from ^A to ^A tab. 9. fig. 3. from ^N to ^K.]

This partition reacheth altogether to the Center of the Braine and stayeth at that body which we call Corpus callosum. [table 9. figure 3. at ^{L L}.] And this is the reason why alwayes the same part of the head is not pained, but sometimes one part sometimes another, some∣times the whole head.

Some, sayth Laurentius, haue dreamed that the braine is deuided quite through, but they are much deceiued, for the callous body vniteth the parts together. As for the after∣braine though it bee not vnited to the braine, yet is it in two places continued with the be∣ginning of the spinall marrow, and the same marrow by two originalles ioyned vnto the Braine.

The vse of the diuision of the Braine is first out of Vesalius and Archangelus, that the * 1.171 braine might be better nourished, for by this meanes the thinne membrane together with the vesseles there-through conuayed, doe insinuate themselues deeper into the substance thereof: for without this partition and those deepe conuolutions which wee see in it when it is cut, it could not haue beene nourished.

The second vse wee will adde out of Laurentius, to wit, beside the nourishment for the better motion of the same; for as water is not so easily moued where it is deep as where i•• * 1.172 is shallow; so if the braine had beene one entire massie substance, it would not so willingly and gladly as we say, haue risen and falne in the Systole and Dyastole.

The vse of this diuision out of Bauhine is more expresse: for the safe conduct of the Si∣nus or pipes of the hard meninx mentioned in the seauenth Chapter, from whence doe is∣sue * 1.173 small surcles of vessels to conuay nourishment into the conuolutions of the braine.

For because the quantity of the braine is very great, through which the Capillarie ves∣sels were to be dispersed for his nourishment; if the vesselles themselues so small as they are veines and arteries, should haue passed from the backepart to the forepart, from the right side to the left, or on the contrary, they would in so long a iourney through so soft and clā∣my a body haue beene in danger of breaking, wherefore the braine was deuided into three parts; betweene which diuisions there runne foure Sinus or pipes of the hard meninx into which the internall Iugular veines and the sleepy arteries called Carotides ascending from the Basis of the Nowle of the head doe powre their bloud and spirits; which is conuayed on either hand into the after-braine and the brain, by certaine branches deriued out of the height and depth & the sides of those pipes as we sayd ere-while, especially out of the third Sinus, into the left and right parts of the braine.

Finally, because soft bodies when they are great doe easily fall into themselues, there∣fore the braine was diuided into two partes that it might the better consist, as also that the instruments and organs which were led vnto it might not be shufled together: and somuch of the vses of the diuision of the braine.

Now the outward face of the braine which we sayed was of an Ash-colour rather then white, hath many and diuers orbicular circumuolutions and circular ruts, which the Anti∣ents * 1.174 sayeth Vesalius and those after him haue excellently compared to the gired windinges of the guts when the kell is taken off. [Table 8. figure 2. tab. 9. figure 3. ccc.] Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of partes and the 13. Chapter calleth this variam compositionem, and Ve∣salius himselfe compareth them to the Clouds that a Painter maks in the roofe of a house. Some of these snailing paths are deeper, others do not pierce so deep into the substance of the braine [Table 9. figure 4. ^DD] and therefore are called pars varicosa cerebri, the knotted or embossed part of the braine by Laurentius. They are innested with the pia mater or thin meninx (and when that is taken off may be better discerned) which not onely compasseth them and contayneth them in their superficies, but also with them in many places diueth into the depth of the braine.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

Some are of opinion that these conuolutions are onely * 1.175 framed of necessity, but haue no vse at all: but we with Ga∣len do determine that their vse * 1.176 is to secure the vessels, that go∣ing together with the Pia ma∣ter they might carry vnto the braine nourishment and life, and not be in danger of brea∣king in the perpetuall motion and agitation of the brain. For the Pia mater being a thin and fine membrane and simple (not double that the vesselles might run betwixt the dupli∣cation thereof) needed these winding Meanders to secure the vessels.

[illustration]

II.

But if the superficies or surface of the braine had bin smooth and aequall & the vessels had run along about the circum∣ference thereof they had been subiect to breaking, especially in the Dyastole or Eleuation & in the full of the Moone, at which time the braine by rea∣son of the humidity thereof so swelleth that the vessels must needs haue borne vpon the Scull. Beside, the vesselles would not haue beene suffici∣ent to haue irrigated and wa∣tered the huge and vast body & bulk of the brain if they had onely runne ouer the surface thereof. Platerus addeth further; because the venall and ar∣teriall * 1.177 bloud arising to the braine is not yet fit for the vse thereof, it was necessary it should runne in proper vessels, and that into the inmost substance of his marrow where the in∣bred power of the braine might labour it and purge it from those excrements which are ga∣thered and heaped vp in these Conuolutions, that being so prepared the braine might ap∣ply it vnto his nourshment and also for the procreation of Animall spirits.

Another vse of the Conuolutions remembred also beside Bauhine by Archangelus and Laurentius is; for the recreation of the spirits and the bloud contained in those vessels. For * 1.178 if there had not beene these gyrations in the substance of the braine, the vessels especially in the full of the Moone would haue beene so closely compassed by the Scull, that their moti∣on would haue beene intercepted, and the spirit being compressed would haue beene suf∣focated or strangled, and the heate for want of ventilation extinguished.

Erasistratus thought that the braine of a man had more Conuolutions then the braines of other creatures because of his reasonable soule; which conceite of his Bauhine, Arch∣angelus * 1.179 and Laurentius do sweetly smile at, when, they behold the same conuolutions in the braine of an Asse, the most dull and stupid of all other creatures. Beside we learne out of Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 13, chapter, that vnderstanding follow∣eth not the variety of the composition but the good temper and disposition of that bodye which vnderstandeth. Laurentius and Columbus thinke that Nature by these conuoluti∣ons * 1.180 prouided for the lightenesse of the braine, and to make it more prompt and ready for motion. But Archangelus taxeth them for it. As if (saith he) Nature could not haue made it of a lighter matter if that had beene behoouefull, or a little lesse and so lighter? Beside

[illustration]

Tab. 9. Fig. 3. sheweth the braine vncouered from both his Membranes, and laid on the one side that the processe or duplication commonly com∣pared to a Mowers Sythe, which diuideth the Braine; as also the Callous body might better be shewed.

[illustration]

Fig. 4. sheweth the Braine freed from his Mem∣branes, as also a part of the braines it selfe is ta∣ken away that the marrow and the ventricles might be better discerned.

[illustration]

TABVLA. IX.

[illustration]

FIG. III.

[illustration]

FIG. IV.

• A A, The right side of the Braine.
• B B, the left side of the Braine.
• C C, the conuolutions or breaches of the Braine.
• D D, the duplication or processe of the dura¦meninx called the Sythe.
• E E E, the beginning of the vessels procee∣ding out of the third Sinus into the thin membrane are heere broken off.
• F, A passage running out of the fourth Sinus in manner of a veine into the lower part of the thicke membrane,
• G G, Certaine propogations of this passage running vpward into the same membrane.
• H H, Certaine Surcles disseminated from the lower side of the third Sinus into the pro∣cesse.
• I I, the beginnings of the vessels which passe from the fourth Sinus into the thin Mem∣brane.
• K the beginning of a vessell bred out of the fourth Sinus, which runneth vnder the arch into the third ventricle to make the Plexus or thrumbe of crisped vessels therein.
• L L, the Callous body of the braine.
• M M, the Sinus on eyther hand, at the sides of the Callous body.
• N, A portion of the Sythe which groweth to the partition of the Organe of smelling.
• O O, the thin membrane or Pia mater.
• P P, Parts of the thicke membrane reflected.

[illustration]

Fig. 4.

• A A A, B B B. the right and the left sides of the marrow of the braine remaining yet in the Scull,
• C C C, A part of the braine taken away.
• D D, D, Diuisions or lines frō the breaches of the braine.
• E E E E, the Shel or Barke of the braine com∣passing his marrow.
• G G, H H, the marrow of the braine which when it is pressed is full of red points or small drops or graynes.
• I I I, the Callous body freed on eyther side from the substance of the braine.
• K K, A part of the Callous body. L L, M M, the right & the left ventricle of the braine.
• N N, A part of the vpper side of the left ven∣tricle.
• O O, the complication or thrumbe of vessels called Plexus Choroides.
• P P, Small veines growing to the ventricles.
• Q. Other vessels running frō the same veins into the Pia mater or thin membrane.

we see that the heart is of a most solid and firme substance without any of these gyrations & yet it moueth in Systole and Dyastole very freely. Vesalius and Laurentius adde that they were also ordained for the supportation of the soft substance of the braine that it might aequally * 1.181 be supported and not sway too much to eytherside. And thus much for the vses of these conuolutions as also for the vpper part of the substance of the braine.

Now the internall or inward superficies hath in it diuers parts and impressions because of the many vses for which Nature hath ordained it. The substance therefore of the Braine * 1.182 is by Archangelus diuided into the Braine and the Marrow. The Braine he calleth that Ash-coloured part which compasseth the rest, whereby he meaneth the marrow: we will say it may be diuided into the Shell and the Kernell. The Shell is that Ash-coloured bodye * 1.183

[Table 9. figure 4. Table 10. fig. 5. ^{E F}] which compasseth immediatly the kernel or marrow. The kernell or marrow is that white body [Table 9. fig. 4. ^{G H} Table 10. fig. 5. ^{G H} Table 11. fig. 7. and 8. ^{E E}] which is hid within the ash-couloured body and is somewhat more solide; for this white body is within the ash-coloured body as the christaline humor of the eie is in the glassie humour. Wherefore the shell differeth from the kernell first in colour, the one ash-coloured the other white; then in consistence for the shell is softer the kernell a little harder firmer and more compact; then in scituation because the kernell is in the middest the shell in the circumference distinguished with oblique and crooked lines.

Wherefore the kernel or Marrow is the middle and white body of the braine, of which * 1.184 there are two parts; one contayned within the skull, the other falling out of it and length∣ned downe to the great hole of the occiput and ending in the spine of the back. These two bodies also, the shel and the kernel, may actually be separated if we haue the head of a sound * 1.185 man newe slaine and presently with dexterity dissected, otherwise both of them will grow very moyst and extreame soft, as it hapneth to the mammillary processes which are the in∣struments of smelling, which in a fresh body may easily bee parted at the marrow, but not so if the body haue beene dead any time.

Now if you dissect the braine ouerthwart, about the middest of it you shall perceiue small vessels therein descending to his ventricles, and if the marrowey substance be pressed * 1.186 there will start out of it many drops or graines of bloud, which make me remember that of Hip. in his book of the falling sicknesse. Many and small veines doe ascend out of the whole body vnto the braine, and especially two notable, one from the Liuer another from the Spleene: in the quest of which (if any such be) I would haue the great Anatomistes spend some of their cu∣rious howres.

Aristotle in the first booke of his History and the 16. Chapter is of opinion, that the * 1.187 braine is altogether without bloud (that we finde false by manifest experience) neither con∣tayneth any veine within it, but that onely the Meniux about it hath veines. Vesalius lea∣neth * 1.188 too neare vnto him, for these are his wordes: The substance of the Braine and After-braine is neuer found with any veines therein, although you shall find in those that die mad or phreneticall and such as are hanged, certaine red and bloudy specks or spots; but these spottes carry no resemblance of a veine at all. Notwithstanding, though these two great Clarkes, the one the Genius of Nature and the very President of her priuy Councell and the other the Eye of Anatomie, haue thus resolued vpon the case: I presume there is some∣thing * 1.189 in that Hippocrates hath so particularly related, whose vse is not so peremptorily to seduce his Reader: but I leaue the disquisition to those whose meanes and oportunities are fit for such priuy searches, onely adding this one thing which I confidently auouch, that the onely writings of Hippocrates after so many ages and Commentaries past, haue in these dayes led the diligent and studious Readers into the knowledge of more mysteries of our Art, then all the writers in the world beside; for he alone is a boundlesse and bottomles o∣cean of Physicke: we returne to our history.

If you lightly with your fingers deuide the sides of the braine till you come to a veine * 1.190 of a notable bignesse running through his length and sprinckling branches on either hand into the braine, there will offer it selfe vnto your view a body placed exactly in the middest of the braine [Table 9. fig. 3. ^{L M}] gibbous or rising somewhat round [Table 9. figure 2. ^L] in which sayeth Archangelus the two first ventricles are excauated, long, narrow, smooth and * 1.191 equall, whiter also then the vpper part as being made of the marrow or inward substance, which because it is harder and somewhat like a callus or hardnesse of the skinne gotten by labour but much whiter is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, by Galen in the 9. Booke of his Anatomicall Administrations and the third Chapter, that is, A callous body. It is a part continued with the braine, wherefore at the sides thereof in his length two Sinus or ventricles [Table 9. fig. 3. at ^•] are hollowed in the marrow of the braine like deep lines or hollow pipes, which are esteemed to receiue the defluxion, of rheume, or phlegme out of the vpper partes of the * 1.192 braine, and to send it forward by the gibbous superficies of the callous body vnto the nose. But the vse of the callous body vndoubtedly is by his vpper part to sustaine the waight of the braine which lieth vpon it, and that by his mediation both the parts of the brain might be conioyned, as also to make a distinction or hedge which they call septum [Table 10. fig. ••. ^•• holdeth vp ^YY, ^XX, and ^XY lift vp ^{S T V}, least ^{A A A} in the sixt figure should presse ^{H I} in the same fig, or ^H in the 7 and 8. figures of the 11. Table] which separateth the two ventricles; which partition it also sustaineth & lifteth vp the arch called Fornix, least falling downe it should

compresse the third ventricle.

In this place sayth Bauhine in the yeare 1582. I found a scirrhus or hard tumor in the no∣ble * 1.193 Baron Bonacurtius (who lay a long time in a manner Apoplecticall or astonished) when we opened his head after his death.

When we haue cut away the substance of the braine on either hand as deepe as vn∣to the Callous body before we lift it vp, we must mark the septū or partition of the two first ventricles.

This septum or partition [table 10. fig. 5. at^RRR reflected backeward] in the vpper part groweth to the Callous body and is perfectly vnited thereto (wherefore Vesalius calleth it * 1.194 the inner or lower superficies of that callous body) but below it groweth to the place of the Arch or Fornix, so that it standeth in the middest between the callous body and the Arch. This septum before it be stretched is loose & rugous and doeth not shine, neither can you perceiue how it is continued with those bodies of the Callus and the Arch; but drawe it vp so high till it be streatched (and take heed it breake not for it is but thinne) and then if you put a waxe candle to one side of it you shall perceiue the brightnesse of the light through * 1.195 it as if it were through a glasse. Vesalius compares it to the host in the Masse, which being a thinne wafer and a little wet you may see a dull light through it; or say it is like a sliuer of the Muscouy glasse whereof we vse to make Lanthorns, or the horne of a lanthorn it selfe. Whereupon Columbus, Archangelus and Laurentius haue called it speculum, speculum luci∣dum, * 1.196 septum lucidum and lopis specularis, the Looking-glasse. Galen giueth it a name from his vse in his 9. Book Anatomicis Aministrationibus, the first, the third and the fourth chap∣ters, calling it 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, The partition of the foremost ventricles, because the inner lips of the ventricles are hereby distinguished; wherefore you cannot aright per∣ceiue it vnlesse both the ventricles be layd open, and if it be neuer so little too much stret∣ched it easily breaketh, because it is so very thinne and subtile, yet cannot it not be manifest∣ly seene vnlesse it be lifted vp.

An Anatomist therefore in these curious thinges had neede to haue a fine and a dainty hand and at command. This partition is of the same substance (sayth Galen in the book be∣fore named and the third Chapter and after him Vesalius) with the braine but thinner, and * 1.197 in respect of his tenuity as it were the substance of the braine drawne out into a membrane. Columbus and Archangelus thinke it is nothing else then the pia mater in this place duplica∣ted; but Laurentius and Bauhine agree with Galen. Yet though it bee thinne it is not sim∣ple, and it hath in the middest a little rising like a line [Table 10. figure 5. ^Y] which line bea∣ring downward is by degrees lessened and becommeth the partition of the ventricles. [tab. 10, fig. 5. the lower part of the septum at x x the vpper at^Y.]

These ventricles beeing taken away to the middest of their substance, wee meete with foure swelling particles: two before, about which is the Basis of the ventricles; two on the backeside making the Arch or Fornix of which wee will entreate in the next Chap∣ter.

CHAP. XI. Of the ventricles of the Braine, the Arch, and the Plexus Choroides.

ALthough the Cauity which is in the Brain be continuated quite through, yet because according to the forme of the Braine and the vse it is diuers∣ly formed, so that one part is more dilated another more angustated or contracted; therefore the Anatomists haue diuided it into certaine pla∣ces, * 1.198 and the larger of them they cal ventricles, the narrower they call me∣atus or passages. The ventricles called by Galen 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Antients and many of the new writers also following therein Herophylus haue reckoned foure. In the Braine three; two foreward a right and a left, and the third in the middest. The fourth they make common to the after-braine and the spinall marrow.

The first two of (these called by Archangelus the Superior because they hang ouer the o∣ther; by Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts the 10, 11, and 12, chapters and diuers other places the Anterior ventricles) are cut out of the marrow of the braine and are the largest of all the rest, because (saith Laurentius) they containe a crasse spirit or rather aboundance of phelgme. They are on eyther side one, the right on the right hand and the left on the left, alike each to other in scituation, forme, magnitude and vse. They are scituate length wise in the marrow of the braine in the very middest thereof, [Tab. 9, fig. 4, Tab. 10, fig. 5, ^I

fig. 6, the right is noted with ^D but the left in the 9 Table and the 4, figure and the 10. Ta∣ble and the fift figure at ^M in the 6. figure at^E] whether you respect the length or the depth of it. In their fore and hinder parts they are broader and more disioyned, in the midst lesse where they are only diuided by that thin partition we spake of in the former chapter. [tab. 10, fig. ••, ^{XX YY}] They runne obliquely or semicircularly saith Archangelus, [Tab. 9, fig. 4, from * 1.199 ^L to ^M] for beginning about the temples where the marrow begins, they are by little and lit∣tle curued toward the center of the marrow, and at the Region of the Eares they are bent againe, and so seeme to make two Semicircles. They are long, winding & somewhat large. Their forepart is blunt and round [tab. 9, fig. 4, and tab. 10, fig. 5, ^L and the lower^M] and in their inside they ••••nke downe vnto the third ventricle, [Tab. 10, fig. 5, vnder^{S T V} and in the 6. figure at^H and^I, in the eleuenth table and the 7, fig. at^H] whereupon some who haue not diligently followed their curued passage haue thought that beside these two there are other two ventricles in the forepart of the braine, and so haue made vp the number of sixe ventricles; but we esteeme them to be portions of these vpper, for they are indeede larger then vsually they are esteemed. Backward also they are obtuse and round, [tab. 9, fig. 4, the vpper^L and^M] and do descend by degrees downeward into the substance of the brayne, and foreward are straightened like the small end of a horne, and so creepe on to the mammilla∣ry processes and the ingresse of the opticke Nerues [tab. 11, fig. 7, and 8. ^{F G}] and the sleepy arteries. Their vpper face is lined with a waterish moysture, and they are often found full * 1.200 thereof. Their vpper part [tab. 9, fig. 4, from ^L to ^L and from ^N to ^N] according to the length of the braine is smooth and aequall; the lower part is vnaequall, [tab. 10, fig. 6, ^R or ^S] because of the hollownesse prepared to receiue the defluxion of the phelgme; which hollownes creepeth obliquely out of the backepart of the ventricles foreward into their common ca∣uity: * 1.201 For these two ventricles, as we shall say by and by, do determine into a common caui∣ty. Galen and the ancients after him do write that the superficies of the first three ventricles are as the brayne couered with the Pia mater. Vesalius denyeth it and addeth a reason: for, saith he, if the ventricles were lined within, the Membranes would hinder the substance of the braine from working the matter conueyed into them into Animall spirits. But Columbus and Archangelus side with Galen against him, and Archangelus thinketh that the septum luci∣dum is made of the duplication of the Pia mater after it hath inuested these ventricles. We leaue this to be farther scanned by the curious Dissectors: sure we are that that which is cal∣led Plexus Chorides lyeth vpon them, from whence small veines [tab. 9, fig. 4, ^PP. tab. 10, fig. 5, ⁿ figure 6, ^oo] are deriued which grow in the forepart to their substance, like vnto those which runne through the coate of the eye called Tunica Adnata. Archangelus is of opinion that the Pia mater being it selfe of exquisite sense may by meanes of these small veynes suf∣fer inflamation, whence come those deepe paines which are sometimes felt in the Center * 1.202 of the brayne. And indeed Galen maketh expresse mention both of the Pia mater com∣passing their cauity as we haue saide before, as also of these veines which insinuate them∣selues into the ventricles in the second and third Chapters of the 9. Book of his Anatomi∣call Administrations: so that Archangelus doeth but gather the conclusions out of Galens praemises.

It behooued sayeth Galen in the 8. Booke of the Vse of Parts and the 10. Chapter, that * 1.203 there should bee two of these ventricles, (because the Braine and euery organ of sence is double; for the braine is the first and most common cause of all those double organs) that if one of them be violated, the other might serue the turne; and this hee prooueth by an in∣stance of a young man of Smyrna, who was wounded into one of these ventricles and yet * 1.204 escaped: but sayth hee, if both of them had beene wounded he could not haue liued a mo∣ment of time.

Vesalius (as he is an importunate aduersary of Galens, the lesse his thanke) reproueth him * 1.205 for this, alledging that though the braine be parted into two, yet it is againe vnited before the ventricles are formed therein; and to say trueth it is hard to conceiue how one ventri∣cle should be wounded and the other not violated, considering the thinnesse of the men∣brane or partition that parteth them, and beside the common cauity whereinto they both determine; but experience often assureth vs of that which meere Reason and discourse wil not allow of or subscribe vnto.

The vse of these ventricles is according to Galen in his eight Booke of the Vse of Parts * 1.206 Chap. 10. and 11. that of the ayre which we draw in conuayed into the brain by the organs of smelling & of the vitall spirit ascending from the hart by the sleepy arteries, the Animal

spirites prepared before in plexu choroide might in those ventricles bee perfected, but how perfected? Vesalius thinketh by the particular substance and forme of the Brain. Archan∣gelus * 1.207 thinketh they haue no such vse or power as to make Animall spirites. Laurentius sayth that they serue for the inspiration and expiration of the Braine, to receiue smels and to prepare the Animall spirites, and to containe them as it were in a store-house yet not perfectly accomplished but inchoated onely. Archangelus subscribeth vnto this and * 1.208 addeth moreouer, that the ayre drawne through the nose and spongy bone into the ventri∣cles, is laboured and prepared for the nourishment and refection of the Animall spirites, as the ayre is prepared in the Lungs for the refrigeration & recreation of the vital spirits. An∣other vse sayth he of them is (but that onely a secundary vse) to serue for wayes whereby the excrements of the braine may be purged. Neither sayth he, is there cause why we should wonder that the same ventricles should hold the Animal spirits and serue also for the able∣gation of excrements, seeing we know that Nature hath ordained the Nose first and pri∣marily to be a meanes of smelling, and secondarily to call out the phlegme out of the brain and auoide the same.

Wee sayeth Bauhine thinke, they serue to gather the excrements which are separated * 1.209 in the nourishment of the Brain, the phlegme (for example there) engendred, and by their common passage to send it into the Tunnell called Infundibulum to bee conuayed away by the throate.

Archangelus in this place maketh mention of a passage which is sayth he) is in the mid∣dest * 1.210 vnder the mamillary processes and hath a double issue, one directly into the ventricles wee speake off, the other into the pallate and so into the Lungs. This passage is knowne but to a few, neither can it be found but in a sound Brain when the man commeth to a sud∣den and vnlooked for end and is presently dissected; for the partes of the braine that are a∣bout this passage do in a short time so fall and close together that the passage is cleane ob∣literated.

Hence Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 10. Chapter sayed, that the ayre * 1.211 we breath in by our noses passeth vnto the heart, but a part of it getteth into the ventricles where it is prepared and made the nourishment of the Animall spirites. Columbus ascri∣beth the finding out of this passage to himselfe, but Archangelus taxeth him therfore. And so much of the two first ventricles.

The third ventricle followeth, which is nothing else but the concurrence or meeting of the two former lengthned out somewhat backward. For the two former ventricles in their * 1.212 lower part vnder the Arch [Table 10. fig. 5. ^STV] figure 6. ^AAA] do meet together in one place & there determine, being in their nether parts like a narrow path which runneth out backe ward a pretty length into the hindmost ventricle. This is called by Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 12. Chapter, the common cauity or common place of the fore∣ward * 1.213 ventricles; [Table 10. figure 6. vnder ^{M I} table 11. fig. 7. and 8. ^M] by others who doe de∣ny the third ventricle it is called the perforation of the two former ventricles: others call it the third ventricle or the middle ventricle, because it is in the middest of the braine, yea and in the very Center of the marrowe betwixt the two forewarde ventricles and the fourth.

This at the first sight is like a long slit or cauity, [Tab. 11. fig. 7. and 8. ^•] but more back∣ward * 1.214 it becommeth larger, and is discerned, part of it when the arch is drawne a little back∣ward, part of it when the Testicles and the Buttocks of the braine are diuided in the midst. It tendeth directly from the forward ventricles vnder the arch, the testicles and the but∣tocks, [Table 12. fig. 10. from ^I to ^K] toward the fourth ventricle [Tab 12-fig 10. ^• sheweth the end of it.] And this is Galens delineation of his passage in his 8. book of the Vse of parts and the 11. chapter, whereunto Vesalius, Platerus, Archangelus and Laurentius do subscribe, but Columbus maketh it shorter and sayth it endeth at the backeward passage neare to the Glandula pinealis. The figure of it sayeth Archangelus is vncertaine because there are many eminencies or inequalities in it.

This third ventricle hath two passages, of both which Galen maketh mention in his 9. * 1.215 booke of Anatomicall Administrations and the fourth Chapter, the one he calleth the vp∣per hole or the Tunnell, the other the great hole of the third ventricle, wee according to Bauhine will describe them thus.

The one [Table 11. fig. 7. and 8. ^I] proceedeth out of the middest of the ventricle and is * 1.216 reasonable large: it is caued in the substance of the braine and runneth directly downward

toward the Bason which receiueth the phlegme at the Basis of the braine, and by it the phlegme of the two forward ventricles doth descend.

The other passage [Table 11. fig 7. and 8. ^K] which is the more backeward (Laurentius addeth the larger also is not round in his originall although it be a part of the third ventri∣cle * 1.217 which is round. Galen in the 9, booke of his Anatomicall Administrations and the 5. Chapter, thinketh that it hath a peculiar coate like that of the pia mater wherewith it is ly∣ned. It runneth vnder the Buttocks [Table 11, fig. 7. ^MN fig. 8. ^NOPQ table 12. fig. 19. ^DEFG] and * 1.218 the Testicles into the fourth ventricle aboue the beginning of the spinall marrow. Out of the lower and forward angle of this passage, as soon as it is gotten vnder the testicles, there issueth another passage [Table 11. fig, 8. neare to ^K] farre narrower then the former, which passing slily forward through the substance of the braine, sinketh downeward and determi∣neth in the end [Table 11. fig. 8. ^I] of the first passage; out of both which ariseth an orifice [Table 15. figure 20. ^D] which endeth in the Bason, and leadeth the phlegme out of the third ventricle. This Vesalius taxeth Galen for pretermitting, in the place next aboue named. * 1.219 Now whereas at the second passage there appeareth a certaine slitte or cleft, Columbus will needs liken the same vnto the lap or priuity of a woman.

The vse of the third ventricle is to be a receptacle of the Animall spirit, which also is by * 1.220 Nature so quaintly formed (for Archangelus referreth all those resemblances of the arch, the buttocks, the testicles, the fundament, the womans lap and the yarde vnto the third ventri∣cle) that it driueth them into the fourth ventricle.

Aboue this third ventricle lyeth the Fornix or Arch called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, be∣cause in forme and vse it resembleth a crosse vault or arch. Columbus calleth it Corpus came∣ratum * 1.221 The vaulted body, which (saith he) is supported with 3. pillers. This arch is but one and lyeth vnder the Callous body almost in the middle of the braine but a little backward, and swelleth equally out of both sides thereof: for it is common to both sides of the brain. * 1.222 It groweth out of the backe part of the two vpper ventricles [Table 9. figu. 4. the vpper ^{L M} * 1.223 Table 10. fig. 5. ^ST figure 6. ^BC] where they bow forward. VVhilest it is contayned within the brain it is a long and callous body, yet broader toward the backpart, but as it creepeth for∣ward it groweth sharpe to his very end. [Table 10. fig. 5. from ^{S T} to ^V fig. 6. from ^BC to the vp∣per ^A.] At that forward sharpe end [tab. 10. fig. 6. at ^P] it is againe ioyned to the substance of the braine as also to the callous body; but in the middest and in the rest of his bredth it is free and at liberty [tab. 10. fig. 5. ^XX.]

The figure of it is Triangular but consisting of vnequall sides, so sayth Galen in his eight booke of the Vse of parts and the 11. Chapter. Vesalius and Laurentius call it semicircular, or * 1.224 rather like a bridge whose backpart standeth vpon two knees, the forward vpon one. For first in the backpart it reacheth from one of the ventricles ouer to the other, and that side is short [Table 10. fig 5. from ^S to ^T and fig. 6. from ^• to ^D.] The two other sides are equall and somewhat longer, reaching from the backpart to the forepart [tab. 10. fig. 5. from ^• to ^V and frō ^T to ^Y fig. 6. from ^• to the vpper ^A and from ^C to the vpper ^A] so that backward it hath two Arches and forward one, and standeth like a threefooted stoole vpon the braine.

The substance of it is like the substance of the ventricles but somewhat whiter and har∣der, * 1.225 like the substance of the callous body. It is no where compassed with the pia mater, and in the bottome where it archeth ouer the ventricle, it is free and at liberty not tyed to any of the adiacent parts. [Table 10. fig. 6. ^AAA.] In the sides where it respecteth the two forward ventricles [tab. 10. fig. 5. at ^LM.] it is supported, backeward with two props and forward with one; the superficies of it is smooth and moystned with a waterish humor.

On the outside neare the originall it is gibbous, embowed [tab. 10. fig. 5. ^ST] or conuex, and in the originall orbicular or round, that without payne (sayth Galen in the 8. de vsu par∣tium and the 11.) or desease it might sustain the waight of the braine lying vpon it, that the common passage or third ventricle vpon which it coucheth, might be kept open and large and not compressed, because vnder it the two first ventricles do meete.

In the length of it it swelleth a little in the middest like a broade line [table 10. figure 5. ^••] by which it is continued with the partition of the ventricles called septum lucidum.

VVithin it is hollow [Table 10. fig. 6. ^AA] as well for the free passage of the spirits, as al∣so that the vessell [table 10. fig. 6. ^{H I} table 11. fig. 7. ^V arising from ^T] arising out of the fourth Sinus of the Dura mater and deuided into the two forward ventricles, might passe vnder it and not be pressed by the substance of the braine hanging ouer it. And thus much of the arch.

[illustration]

Table 10. Figure 5. sheweth the same that the former Table did, sauing that the Callous body in the foreside separated from the Braine, and reflec∣ted backward, and torne from that partition which distinguisheth the ventricles, is heere more mani∣festly to bee perceiued, together with the Fornix or Arch of the Braine.

[illustration]

Figure 6. sheweth the Arch loosned on the fore∣side and drawne backward, that the lower part and the vessels might better be seene.

[illustration]

TABVLA. X.

[illustration]

FIG. V.

[illustration]

VI.

[illustration]

Figure 5.

• RRR, The lower super ficies of the callous body reflected.
• STV, The triangular surface of the For∣nix or Arch.
• XX, The lower part of the partition of the ventricles continuated with the Arch.
• YY, The vpper part of the partition con∣tinued with the callous body.

[illustration]

Figure 6.

• AAA, The lower surface of the Arch.
• BC, Two corners of the Arch by which it is continuated with the ventricles.
• DE, The right and left ventricles.
• FG, Arterie climbing vp from the slee∣py arteries thorough the lower side of the ventricles for the forming of the complication of vesselles which is cal∣led Plexus choroides.
• H, A vessel issuing out of the 4. Sinus vn∣der the Arch & passing into the third ventricle.
• IKL, The diuision of this vessell, a part whereof goeth to the right ventricle at K and another to the left at L.
• MN, The Plexus choroides made of the artery FG and the vessell H.
• OO, Small veines passing thorough the ventricles of the braine produced from the vessels K and L.
• P, Other veines arising from the same, dis∣persed without the ventricles into the pia mater.
• Q a passage from the third ventricle vn∣to the Bason or Tunnell.
• RS, Canales or Sinus grauen or furrow∣ed in the substance of the ventricles in which the phlegme is led along to the orifice of the foresaid passage marked with Q.

The Plexus Choroides hath his scituation in the forward ventricles [Table 13. figure 13. Δ] * 1.226 betwixt them and the Arch, they are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because they are like the 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is, the After-birth or membrane which compasseth the Infant. But by all A∣natomists they are called Plexus Chore formes or Reticulares.

They are complications of small vessels in the ventricles of the brain compassed with the pia mater [Table 9, fig. 4.^OO table 10, fig. 5.^OO fig. 6.^MN.]

* 1.227 How and of what vessels they are made is diuersly set downe by the Authours of A∣natomy, and because it is a speciall matter and of subtile conuayance, I will not spare my * 1.228 labour to set downe the diuers delineations of Archangelus, Laurentius, Vesalius, Fallopius, and Bauhine.

[illustration]

Table 11. Figure 7. sheweth the Brain, where∣in that part is taken away which made the vpper ventricles and did lie vppon the Cerebellum: here also the vessell led along from the fourth Si∣nus, is separated from the Plexus Choroides & so eleuated, that the third ventricle, the Sinus of the Dura Meninx, and the After-braine it selfe may better be descerned.

[illustration]

Figure 8. sheweth the Braine yet further dis∣sected and more of it taken away, so that the Te∣sticles are diuided that you may see the passage of the third ventricle into the fourth, and the Cere∣bellum vncouered from the thick membrane.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XI.

[illustration]

FIG. VII

[illustration]

VIII

• AABB, Portions of the braine remaining yet in the skull,
• CCC, The lines of the conuolutions of the braine toward the Basis thereof.
• DD, the Barke of the braine.
• EEE, the white marrow of the brain circum∣scribed with lines.
• FG, Parts of the sleepy arteries.
• H, the lower side of the third ventricle disten∣ded.
• I, the anterior hole of the third vētricle which goeth into the Tunnell.
• K, The posterior hole of the third ventricle which goeth vnto the fourth.
• L, the pine-glandule vppon which lyeth the venall vessell marked with V when it is in his proper scituation.
• MN, the Buttocks and Testicles of the brain.
• OO, A processe of the Dura Meninx betwixt the braine and the after-braine.
• PPQQ the first & second Sinus of the Dura Meninx.
• R, the Presse of the braine called Torcular, or the congression and meeting together of the foure Sinus.
• S, the beginning of the third Sinus.
• T, the fourth Sinus opened,
• V, a reflected and broken vessel of the fourth Sinus which runneth into the ventricles.
• XX, the Cerebellum or After-brain couered with the pia mater or thin membrane.
• Y, A passage from the fourth Sinus into the thin membrane where it couereth the after braine and the testicles.
• ZZ, the connexion of the thick membrane or Dura Meninx with the stony-bone, which contayneth the organs of hearing.

[illustration]

Figure 8.

• AABB, That part of the braine which remay∣neth,
• CDE, the lines, the barke and the marrow of the braine,
• FG, Portions of the sleepy arteries,
• H, the forepart of the third ventricle,
• I, the hole vnto the Tunnel or Bason,
• K, Another hole from the passage L deriued to the first hole I,
• L, the backpart of the third ventricle descen∣ding to the fourth.
• M, the Pine-glandule depressed toward the side.
• NOPQ the testicles and buttocks of the braine.
• RR, the Cerebellū couered with the pia mater,
• SS, Certaine vesselles which do compasse the pia mater and do afford small branches
• TT, to the sleepy arteries,
• VV, the thicke meninx which did inuest the Cerebellum,
• xx, vessels from the Dura meninx sprinkled in∣to the tenuis
• zz, the cōnexiō of the dura meninx to the skul.

Archangelus thus: It is made of arteries (to which no veines are ioyned) creeping vp in∣to * 1.229 the ventricles through the inside of the braine from that admirable net or complication seated in the saddle of the wedge bone.

Laurentius thus: It is a mazey laberynth of small veines and arteries running through the * 1.230 parts of the pia mater as it riseth vpward.

Vesalius and with him Platerus thus: It is wouen of a braunch of the fourth artery, and * 1.231

of the vessels proceeding out of the fourth Sinus of the dura Mater, and of the Pia Mater, and a duskish kinde of flesh.

Fallopius in his Institutions more particularly thus. It is made of Arteries onely with∣out any admixtion of Veines, partly of the Soporary Artery which also maketh the rete¦mirabile * 1.232 or wonderful Net, partly of Arteries which ascend through the transuerse pro∣cesses of the Necke and go into the Braine by that large hole whereout the spinall mar∣row yssueth; and are led vnder the Basis of the braine, and do degenerate into Vesselles like Veines, which vniting themselues into one braunch doe approach forward to that place where the wonderfull Net is made by those soporarie Arteries, and being vnited with these do make the Plexus Choroides which passeth through all the foure Ventricles, & as it passeth thorough the third Ventricle when it commeth to the fourth Sinus of the Dura Mater it is ioyned thereto by certaine small and slender branches.

Bauhine yet more particularly thus. It is wouen of vessels which arriue at the Ventri∣cles * 1.233 partly running from the fourth Sinus of the Dura Mater, partly of Arteries arising other-whence. For from the end of the fourth sinus of the Dura Mater [Tab. 13, Fig: 13, ^•] is formed a venall Vessell, [Tab. 13, Fig. 13, ⁱ] which running through the middle ventri∣cle is led along in the forward Ventricles. [Ta. 13, Fig. 13, ^{l m}] So also another of a branch of the fourth sinus which goeth downeward and forward to the vpper Ventricles [Tab. 13, Fig. 13, ^g] And another of a branch of the fourth Artery of the Braine which passeth into the Ventricles. [Tab. 13, Fig. 13, ^A] All these Vessels are accompanied with a porti∣on of the Pia Mater which embraceth them and knitteth them together; a reddish Flesh or Glandulous substance being scattered betweene them: which Vessels, Membrane and Flesh make the Plexus Choroides. This Webbe or complication ariseth from the Lower part of the Ventricle to the backe part of the Ventricles, and so passeth on till it meete with that Venall vessell [Tab. 13, Fig. 13, from ⁱ to ^R] brought from the fourth sinus fore∣ward thorough the third Ventricle where they ioyne together, and then it distributeth small branches through the substance of the Ventricles [Tab. 10, Fig. 6. from ^F to ^G to ^•• after to ^{K L}, then from ^I to H. Tab. 13, fig. 13, from ^A to ^{s l I}]

In these complications are the Animall spirits concocted, attenuated and prepared, * 1.234 Columbus (as he is alwaies his owne friend) brags that hee first found out the generation of the Animal spirits in this web: but Archangelus gaynsayeth him and quoteth Galen wherhe maketh mention of the same. He also thinketh that the Animall spirit is but inchoated in the Rete mirabile and perfected and absolued in this complication: but the power whereby it is perfected is from the substance of the Marrow of the Braine it selfe. And then that they are powred out from this Plexus into the forward Ventricles, and thence into the Organes of the senses. Platerus cannot admit of this vse of the Plexus, but saith, that because the inner substance of the Braine hath no such complications or gyrations * 1.235 as the outward hath, or vessels deriued vnto it; these Vesselles were by Nature ordained in the center therof, that by them it might receiue vital spirit and a proportion of blood, that as the outsides had aboundance, so the inside might not bee altogether destitute of life and nourishment. And thus farre of the Plexus Choroides.

CHAP. XII. Of the Glandule called Pinealis, the Buttockes, the Testicles and the fourth Ventricle of the Braine.

IN the third Ventricle at the entrance into the fourth, [Tab. 11, figure 7 ^•] there is seated a Glandule or Kernell, [Tab. 11, Fig. 7, ^I. fig. 8, ^M. Table 12 fig. 10, H] * 1.236 resting vpon the foreside of the Testicles, [Table. 11, fig. 7, ^MN] Tab. 12, fig. 10, ^{• D}] and lyeth vnder the Venall vessel [Tab. 10, fig. 6, H, I. Tab. 11, Sig. 7, ^V. Tab. 12, fig: 10, ^I] which springeth out of the fourth Si∣nus, * 1.237 with which vessell also in Dissection it is easily drawne away from the Braine, for in men it scarse cleaueth to the substance of the Braine, but in a Sheep or Calfe it is continuall after a manner with the substance of the Braine: also in Beasts it is much larger then in men, yea not onely this Glandule but all the other partes and parti∣cles of the Braine are farre larger and more conspicuous in bruite beasts then they are in men: and therefore it is fit that yong men should bee initiated and exercised in cutting vp the braines of a Calfe or such like, that when they come to dissect a man they may not be too farre to seeke.

The Figure of it is like a Cone, that is a round turbinated figure, much like the fruit of

[illustration]

Table 12. Figure 9. Sheweth the Cerebellum drawne a little out of the skull aboue the Braine, that the lower surface thereof and the cauity of the spinall Marrow might better bee discerned.

[illustration]

Figure 10. Wherein is shewed a portion of the Braine from which the spinall Marrow taketh his beginning, together with the Testicles, the Buttocke, the Pine-glandule and the fourth Ventricle.

[illustration]

Figure 11. Sheweth a part of the Skull couered with the Dura Meninx, through which the opticke Nerues, the Bason and the sleepy Arteries do passe.

[illustration]

Figure 12. Sheweth the Bason or Tunnell lifted vp, and 4. passages which leade the Phlegmatick excrements of the Brain from the glandule or kernell.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XII.

[illustration]

FIG. IX.

• AA, a part of the Braine left in the skull.
• BCD, Three parts of the Cerebellum reflec∣ted, incompassed with the Pia mater and growing to the marrow of the backe.
• E, The hindermost processe like to a worme called vermi-formis.
• FGH, the beginning of the spinall marrow falling out of the skull to H.
• I, the greater part of the 4. ventricle which is excauated or hollowed in the marrow of the backe.
• K, Vesselles deriued to the Cerebellum from those vessels which are emptied into the first and second Sinus.
• L, other vessels from the dura meninx, sprink∣led into the pia mater.
• MN, the fift and sixt coniugation of nerues.
• O, the toppe of the fourth ventricle like the neb of a quill.
• PQR, The backeward bosome of the skull made to receiue the Cerebellum, which bo∣some is yet couered ouer with the Dura meninx.
• SS TT, the first and second Sinus of the dura mater.

[illustration]

X.

[illustration]

Figure 10.

• AA, Parts of the spinall marrow cutte from the braine.
• BC, the places where this marrow did grow vnto the braine.
• DE, the Testicles. FG, the buttocks, H, the pine-glandule.
• From I to K, a part of the third ventricle go∣ing to the fourth, vnder the Testicles.
• KLMN, A part of the fourth ventricle which is engrauen in the marrow.
• O, the top of the fourth ventricle.
• P, the place where the spinall marrow goeth out of the skull.

[illustration]

XI.

[illustration]

Figure 11.

• AB. Parts of the optick nerues.
• CD, the sleepy arteries. E, the Bason or Tun∣nell hanging downe.
• F, A hole or perforation of the Dura meninx, through which the Tunnell reacheth vn∣to the glandule.
• GG, parts of the second coniugation of sin∣newes.

[illustration]

XII.

[illustration]

Figure 12.

• A, The Glandule. B, The Bason or Tunnell called Peluis or Infundibulum.
• CDEF, the foure holes thorough which the phlegmatick excrement issueth.

a Pine-apple, broade and round in the Basis, and growne smaller but keeping round to the top; and hereupon it is that it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and Glandula Pinealis: some haue resembled it to the end of the Virile member, and therfore call it penis Cerebri, the yarde of the brain. Somewhat long it is, and the Basis sayth Vesalius resteth vpon the substance of the braine, but the top regardeth vpward.

The substance of it is somewhat hard, rather sayeth Vesalius inclining vnto the na∣ture * 1.238 of a glandule then of the Braine, and couered with the thinne membrane. The cou∣lour of it somewhat differeth from that of the marrow, as being a little yellowish. It lyeth vnder the vessell sayth Bauhine [Table 10. fig. 6 H] which goeth to the third ventricle, from which vessell all the webs almost which are in the ventricles doe proceede: and hath the same vse that other glandules haue, which are placed vnder vessels, that is, to confirm their diuisions. For as soone as this vessell entreth into the third ventricle, it is presently diui∣ded into many branches couered ouer with the Pia Mater; and therefore the glandule be∣commeth to them a strength and stay; but Archangelus denyeth this vse of it. Againe, it * 1.239 hath another vse acknowledged by Vesalius, Platerus and Laurentius, and that is to keep the passage of the third ventricle open that it bee not stopped by the ingate of the fore named vessell, and so the Animall spirit hindered from descending into the fourth ventricle.

Archangelus obseruing that this glandule was placed at the beginning of the middle or * 1.240 third ventricle, out of which the spirit is transmitted into the ventricle of the after braine, thought that this glandule had the same vse that the Pylorus of the stomacke hath, to be a Porter as Galen saith to moderate the outgate of the spirits. But the the trueth is, that this * 1.241 Glandule can haue no such vse because it is no particle of the Braine, neither adhereth to the inward sides of the ventricle, but only lyeth vpon it on the outside; neither indeed doth it so nearely touch the passage as that it can stop the same. Indeede if it were a part of the brane (sayeth Galen) then it were more likely, that as the braine is dilated and compressed, the Glandule also should alter his position and somtimes open the passage sometimes shut it, but seeing of it selfe it cannot moue being no part of the Braine, this vse cannot bee attri∣buted vnto it.

Vnto the backeside of the Pine-glandule on either hand the third ventricle and vnder * 1.242 the Arch doe leane foure [Table 11. figure 7. ^MN figure 8. ^NOPQ, table 12. fig. 10. ^•DFG] small bo∣dies, which Galen in his eight Booke of the Vse of Parts and the 14. Chapter, calleth thinne and long eminencies of the braine, for they swell vp round and are somewhat hard. They are particles of the Brain and of the same substance therewith, but their colour apprcoheth nearer sayth Vesalius to the colour of the Braine there where it lyeth next to the Pia Me∣ninx. In their lower part they grow out of the Braine, but aboue and at the sides they are not continued to any part of it or in it, but are onely couered with the Pia mater; but be∣cause they are scituate betweene the forepart of the After-braine and backside of the third ventricle they are better descerned when the Cerebellum is taken away.

And because they carry the representation of two buttocks ioyned together, Galen in his 8. Book of the Vse of Parts and the 14. Chapter called them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 that is, small buttocks; and if you marke well the meeting of these two, and also cast your eye vppon the spinall marrow that descendeth by them, you will readily compare them to a mans thighes set close together. Others comparing thē to Testicles, had rather call them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 then 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Others, because these bodies are not separated into parts, but distinguished onely by ano∣uerthwart line [table 12. figure 10. betwixt ^ED and ^FG] do call those parts of them which are next to the Pine-Glandule [table 12. figure 10.^N] and vppermost, Testicles, and those that are lower, Buttocks: because in their lower and backward part [table 12. figure 10. vnder^• and^G] when the After-braine is remooued, the passage out of the third ventricle into the fourth conspicuously appeareth [tab. 11. fig. 8.^K table 12. fig. 10 aboue^K] which passage re∣sembleth the very fundament between the buttocks.

The vse of these bodies is to sustaine the waight or bulke of the braine, least the third * 1.243 ventricle or the passage [table 11. figure 7. 8.^K table 12. figu. 10.^IK] which goeth out of the third into the fourth should be compressed, and so the Animall spirit intercepted. Some thinke that these particles driue foreward the Pine glandule to shutte vp the passage of the ventricle: and Archangelus thus. The Testicles thrust forward the Gladule, and the But∣tockes thrust forward the Testicles: for if you deuide these particles and enter a Probe at the backe hole of the third ventricle, you shall more plainly perceiue the other part of the third ventricle scituated vnder the Testicles [Tab. 12. figure 10.^I and^K shew the whole third ventricle] which endeth into the fourth.

The left ventricle which Galen in his 8. Booke of the Vse of Parts and the 12. Chapter, calleth the ventricle of the Cerebellum: Laurentius sinus quartus the Common Anatomists * 1.244 the fourth ventricle [table 12. fig. 9. ^I fig. 10.^LMNO with table 15. fig. 21. H] is scituate betwixt the After braine and the spinall marrow for it is common to them both: so sayth Vesalius

It is compounded of the hollownesses of the Cerebellum and the Marrow of the backe, no otherwise then if you ioyne both your hands together and make one hollownes be∣tween them, or as Fallopius hath it in his Institutions. It is scituate in the back part of the Braine, betweene it and the Cerebellum where the beginning of the spinall Marrowe ari∣seth out of the braine, for in it it is for the most part formed. It is the least and the finest of all the Ventricles: the figure of it is round, but withall somewhat long after the fa∣shion of an Egge. At the first it beginneth somewhat large and by degrees is straight∣ned * 1.245 till at length it end in a sharpe corner. For the lower and chiefe cauity of this ven∣tricle * 1.246 is in the spinall Marrow [Tab. 12, fig. 10, from^K to^O] hauing a hollownesse like a slit, which sinus Herophylus likened to the cauity of a writing pen, the end of it which is resembled to the neb of the pen arising on eyther side [Tab. 12, fig. 10,^N] like a wing. The vpper part of it is made of the After-brain and the pia Mater encompassing it. [Tab. 15, fig. 21 H] For this Ventricle is lined with the pia Mater, before [Tab. 11, fig. 7,^XX. neere to^MN] where it ioyneth the Cerebellum to the Braine and to his buttockes, behind [Tab. 11, fig. 8. as it were ioyning^E to^•] where it ioyneth the Cerebellum to the spinall Marrow.

This Ventricle is not double but single, because out of it the Spinall Marrowe was to be produced as Galen saith: now the Spinall Marrow is single, for it had not beene pos∣sible, or if possible, it had not beene fit that one Creature should haue hadde a double Spine. The magnitude therof is conuenient to receyue the Animal spirits out of the for∣ward Ventricles by the common passage or third ventricle and to communicate them * 1.247 to the Nerues which vnder the head are distributed into the whole bodie, whence it was that Herophylus called this Ventricle Principalissimum, the most principall. Yet it is lesse * 1.248 then the forward Ventricles, because (sayth Galen) it conteyneth a thing of more power and Faculty. In this ventricle Vesalius thought was the seate of the Memorie, but wee * 1.249 knowe and are able to demonstrate that no cauity of the bodye is the seate either of the sensatiue soule or of any of her Faculties, but rather the solid substance of the parts.

This Ventricle we finde in Dissections (as also al the rest) to conteine in it a waterish moysture. The two forward beside this water conteyne also the Plexus Choroides [Tab. 9. fig. 4. OO. Ta. 10, fig. 5, OO. fig. 6, ^MN] and the third the Venal Vessel [Ta. 10, fig. 6, H, I. Tab. 11. fig. 7, ^V brought out of^T] which is propagated from the fourth finus of the dura * 1.250 Meninx, and maketh the plexus as we saide before more complicated. Many there are who thinke that all these foure Ventricles do conteine the Animal spirits laboured and perfected in the plexus Choroides.

CHAP. XIII. Of the Tunnel, the Flegmaticke Glandule, the won∣derfull Net, and the vse of the Braine.

AT the first or forward hole of the third Ventricle, or at the sides of that hole or orifice [Tab. 11, fig. 7, and 8 l] we meet with a deepe cauity ioy∣ned aboue to the Braine and made (as saith Galen in his ninth booke of * 1.251 the Vse of parts and the third chapter) of the pia mater compassing the basis of the Braine. For of this pia mater lengthned out is made a round processe or production, [Tab. 15. fig. 20.^CC] whose beginning is large and ample, [Tab. 12, fig. 11, ^E fig. 12, ^B] but after is straightned into a pipe till it end in a long Fistule or quill (wouen with small but many veines) which through a proper hole [Tab. 12. fig. 11,^F] made for it in the Dura mater descendeth and determineth into the Pine-Glandule. This passage by Galen in his ninth Books of the Vse of parts and of Ana∣tomicall Administrations and the third Chapters, as also by many that haue followed him, is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 peluis the Bason. He calleth it also in the place before named 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 In∣fundibulum the Tunnell, because in the top it serueth as a Tunnels top to admit the Hu∣mor, * 1.252 and in the bottome like the pipe to let it out; for by this the thicker excrements of the Braine stored vp in the ventricles are receiued and transmitted to the Flegmaticke Glandule of which we shall speake by and by. Vesalius maketh the vpper part to be cal∣led 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, and compareth it to a Bathing tub such as they vse in Hot houses. The neather part 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which cannot be better compared then to the pipe of a Tunnell such as they * 1.253 run Beere with.

Concerning the vse all Anatomists do agree; but Laurentius me-thinkes for the fashi∣on and the vse compareth it best to such a bagge as wee call Manica Hippocratis in Eng∣lish commonly an Hippoccas bagge, because through it they run; Hippoccas which is called Hip. wine. Next to the bason followeth the flegmatick Glandule. Galen in his 9. book de vsu

partium and the third Chapter calleth it simply 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is, a Glandule. The seate of it * 1.254 is vnder and without the Meninges at the end of the Tunnell in the saddle of the wedge∣bone. For this saddle or bosome of the bone was purposely made to receiue this Glan∣dule: and therefore the forme of them both differeth little; for it is flat hollow aboue, gib∣bous below and almost foure square. The substance is Glandulous, but yet more compact * 1.255 and harder then other glandules. Thicke it is and compassed about with the Pia mater hap∣ly with that part thereof which maketh the Tunnell, and by this Membrane it is tyed to the bone and leaneth to two branches of the soporary Arteries called Carotides which creepe vp by the sides thereof. [Table 12, fig. 12. ^CDEF] This Glandule receiueth the excrements in * 1.256 manner of a sponge as they fall from the braine, which excrement it not onely emptieth into the palate, but also some fals downe by his sides through those holes which are bored in the Basis of the Scul. Neyther was Hippoc. ignorant hereof, who in his books de Glandulis & de locis in omine saith, that Humors fal out of the head through the eares, the eies, the nose; o∣thers * 1.257 by the Pallat into the throat & the gullet, some also through the veins into the spinal mar∣row and into the bloud: that is 7. wayes. For at the sides of this Glandule there are bored two holes in the bōe which descēd, one forward ending in that hole where through the 2. payre of sinewes is led, the other descendeth more backward and passeth by the sharp Cleft at the sides of that hole through which that notable branch of the soporary Artery ascendeth in∣to the Scull, of which outlets we shall speake more at large in the History of the bones.

And these are the wayes by which the phelgme is euacuated out of the braine. For the braine being great and large stood in need of much aliment, and because it is very moist & not very hot out of that much aliment many excrements do arise & are gathered therein; which excrements being of two kindes thinne and thicke, the thin do vapour out through the Sutures, the thicke are euacuated partly by the Nostrils as we haue saide already, part∣ly by the Palate. For those that arise aboue the Ventricles and are stabled in the diuision of the braine are purged by the foreward hole and the Nose, and is called Mucus; we giue it a homely name but proper to it, and call it Snot.

But those that are gathered in the ventricles do most what descend to the Tunnell and are auoided by the Palate, eyther by simple spitting which we call Rheume, or else by er∣creation or hawking which we cal phelgme. And thus much of the Glandule & vse therof.

The Rete mirabile or wonderfull Net which Galen (in the 9. booke of the Vse of parts & * 1.258 the third chapter) calleth, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, [Tab. 13, fig. 14,] that is, the Net like complica∣tion, hath his name from the artificiall figure; for it is made of the soporary arteries, [tab. 13, fig. 14. ^{A B}] which arising vpward from the heart through the Chest climbe vnto the head * 1.259 and at the Basis of the Brayne neere the originall of the opticke Nerues, do make this web or Net. This net compasseth the glandule [Tab. 13, fig. 14, ^•] at the sides of the saddle of the wedge-bone, and is not like a simple Net, but as if you should lay many fishers Nets * 1.260 one aboue another; wherein this is admirable, that the replications of one are tyed to the replications of another so that you cannot separate the Nets asunder, but they are all of them so wrought into one another as if it were a bodye of Net meshed together not into breadth onely, but euen into thicknesse also. In these according to Galen, the Animall spirits make long stay; which haue for this proper and immediate matter the vitall spirits raised vp in the arteries and heere wrought into Animall, from whence they are conuey∣ed into the ventricles of the braine. For saith Galen (in his 9. booke of the Vse of parts and the fourth chapter) where Nature intendeth exactly to forme any thing she prouideth that it shall remaine some good space in the instruments of concoction. Some are of opinion that the vitall spirits are prepared in these small arteries, and some (Archangelus for instāce) that the Animall spirits are inchoated heere and perfected in the Plexus Choroides, that ha∣uing receiued their power and efficacy from the Braine & the marrow thereof, they might yssue into the ventricles and there be stored vp for vse.

Vesalius affirmeth that this wonderfull Net is onely found in the heads of beasts, but we, saith Bauhine, haue beene able to make demonstration of it in all the mens heads we * 1.261 haue hitherto cut vp, although we confesse that in Calues and Oxen it is much greater & more conspicuous. Now these three particles, the Tunnell, the Glandule and the Net cannot be demonstrated before the substance of the After-braine be taken away; and the 2. * 1.262 latter not before the Dura meninx be dissected. Finally, before you make demonstrati∣on of these three, you must shew the spectators the Mamillary processes and the payres or coniugations of the sinewes, which otherwise in the search for these will be defaced.

[illustration]

Table. 13. Figure 13. exhibiteth the vesselles of the Braine and their distribution, especially through the right side, whither they proceede from the internall Iugular veine, or from the sleepie Arterie, or from the sinus of the Dura Meninx.

[illustration]

Figure, 14. sheweth the wonderful Net as Galen describeth it.

[illustration]

Figure 15. sheweth the pituitary Glandule with the Bason and the sleepy Arteries.

[illustration]

Figure 16. sheweth the Rete-mirabile or wonderfull Net, to∣gether with the glandule as it is found in the heads of Calues and Oxen.

[illustration]

TABVLA XIII.

[illustration]

FIG. XIII.

[illustration]

XIV.

[illustration]

XV

[illustration]

XVI.

• A. The internall Iugular veine.
• B. The sleepy or Iugular artery,
• C. the first veine.
• D. the 2 veine which is led vnto the Sinus.
• E, the 3, creeping through the dura meninx
• F, the fourth running into the Sinus.
• G H, the 5 and 6 going to the dura meninx.
• I, the first Artery.
• Φ. A braunch of the same Artery running through the Muscles of the necke.
• K, the second artery reching into the sinus
• L, the third without a companion.
• r A small branch of the third Artery.
• M, N, the 1 & 2 sinus of the Dura Meninx.
• O, the congresse or meeting of both those sinus. PP, the 3 sinus of the Dura Meninx
• Q, The end thereof.
• R, the fourth sinus of the Dura meninx.
• SS, Branches of the first Sinus deriued into the Membranes neere at hand.
• TTTT, Branches of the third Sinus disper∣sed into the Pia Meninx.
• VV, the lower smal branches of the 3. sinus
• XX, the vpper, distributed through the Du∣ra meninx.
• Y Y, certain surcles of the 4 Sinus sent vp∣ward. aa, Others sent downward.
• b, the vpper passage of the fourth Sinus running by the Syth.
• cc, Surcles runing vpward from this passage
• d e, the right & left vpper branches of the fourth Sinus. f, The lower branch going to the Pia mater.
• g, A branch of the same pas••going forward
• h, The same bending backewarde to the Choroides reflected to the Cerebellum.
• i, A notable vessell into the which the 4. Sinus doth determine.
• K the vpper. The by-partition of this vessel in the braine.
• l, m, Two branches of this by-partition.
• n. A surcle reching to the organ of hearing
• ooo, the distribution of the 3 vein & artery,
• ppp, Surcles proceeding from the Brāches marked with o derined into the pia mater
• φ, The diuision of the third artery where it entreth into the scull. s. A braunch reaching to the hollownes of the nostrils
• t, the end of this in the extreamity of the, vessel. uu, 2 branches entring into the scul
• x. A branch deriued vnto the eie from the coition or meeting of the branches uu,
• e, A branch attaining to the pia mater.

A, A brāch attaining to the right ventricle ♌ The complication of vessels called Plexus Choroides formed on either side of the branch marked with A. Fig. 14, A, B, Arteries climbing. the scull, and making this wonderful net. CD, Branches into which the surcles of that net are ioynedin to E, the pituitaryglandule or kernel of flegm Fig: 15. A, the Glandule receiuing the bason. B, the bason it selfe, or if you wil, the Tunnel called Peluis or infundibulum. CC, the sleepy Arteries. D, A branch of the artery going to the side of the Dura Meninx. E, Another branch of the same artery going to the nostrils. FF, An artery in one side diuided into 2 bran∣ches, but in the other side meeting togither againe. G, A partition of the artery creeping through the du∣rameninx, H, Another branch which getteth out of the scull and reacheth to the eies. Figure 16, A The petuitary Glandule. B, C. The sleepye arteries going into the scull. D, D. The wonderfull * 1.263 For the vse of the Braine. Aristotle (in his second booke de partibus Animalium and the 7. chapter) writeth, that the braine was made as a commō good for the behoofe of the whole Creature, to temper the feruour and heate of the heart; which opinion because it is suffici∣ently refuted by Galen in his 3. booke of the Vse of parts and the second chapter wee wil not

insist long vpon it, only these two things we open. First, that the heart is sufficiently refri∣gerated by our perpetuall inspiration and expiration. Secondly, that if Nature had in∣tended the brayne to coole the heart, she would not haue set them so farre distant, but pla∣ced it eyther about the heart or at least in the Chest: as well therefore might he haue saide that the Heele was made for the vse of the heart as the Braine.

Wherefore we determine the vse of the braine to be, first for a habitation for the soule whereby she performeth her Animall functions, as well those that are principall as also * 1.264 those of sense and motion. Secondly, that in the substance thereof the Animall spirits might bee laboured, therein conueyed and from thence deriued into the body. For so saith Galen (in his 8. booke of the Vse of parts and the 13. chapter, and the 9. booke and the * 1.265 4. chapter.) In the whole substance of the body of the Braine is the Animal spirit wrought and reserued, not onely in the ventricles: and in his 12. booke of Method the 5. chapter & the third de locis affect is and the 7. speaking of the falling sicknesse he saith, It is caused in the braine, the humor hindering the Animall spirits which are contained in the ventricles that they cannot yssue out. Thirdly, that the Nerues and spinall marrow might proceede from the marrow thereof, which is so manifest as we neede not cite the places of Galen to proue it. For the Nerues receiue from the braine as from a principle, as we say á quo and of dispensation, the Animal vertue and sensatiue soule which do reside in his substance and do distribute the faculties of sense and motion into the Organs or Instruments of sense & motion as it were through Channels hauing in thē the Animall spirits to conuey the same faculties.

This Animall spirit although it performe many seruices, is one and the same; leading * 1.266 all the faculties of the sensatiue soule through the Nerues into all the parts of the body: but the Instruments into which out of the braine it is powred into the Nerues are manifolde. Wherefore if they runne into the eyes which are the Organs of the sight they make Visi∣on; if into the eares Hearing, &c. This Aristotle (in his second booke de generatione Ani∣malium * 1.267 and the last text) elegantely declareth by the example of a Smiths hammer, for as the hammer is but one instrument yet doth many seruices according to the variety of the subiect vpon which it worketh; so is the spirit in the worke of Natures administrations; & as the beames of the Sunne are one and the same yet appeare diuers if they light vpon di∣uers coulers, so is it with the Animall spirits.

The substance of the Braine although it be deuoide of Animall motion and sense (for * 1.268 it is not deuoide of Naturall) yet is it the originall of sense and voluntary motion which we may better perceiue if we consider that disease which we cal the Apoplexie. For those that are Apoplecticall although all their Instruments of the senses are perfect, yet because the Animal spirits are intercepted they haue no sense at all. For the originall of the spinall mar∣row being totally stopped, all the parts vnder it doe loose doth sense and motion: so also if the Nerue which is conueyed to any part be obstructed, that part is depriued of sense & * 1.269 motion. Hence it followeth that the braine is the seate and residence of the sensatiue soule, and the fountaine of sense and motion. Of sense, because it receiueth the impressi∣ons of all sensible things. Of motion because it dispenseth the knowledge of auoiding that which is hurtfull, and desire to follow after that which is profitable and behoouefull.

As for Natural sense and motion there is a great question whether the braine haue them * 1.270 or no: and first for sense. Hippocrates (in his booke de vulneribus capitis) saith, that the braine hath present and exquisite sense about the Sinciput or sides of the head, because in this place the bone is the thinnest and most of the braine is there contained; beside, the skin of the head is there thinnest also. Moreouer saith he, the diseases of the braine are the most acute and dangerous, yea for the most part mortall and hard to be iudged of by those that are not very well experienced.

Galen (in his first booke of the cause of Symptoms and the 8. chapter) saith, that the braine was not made by Nature an instrument with sense, but so that it is able to comprehend or * 1.271 perceiue all those things by which it suffereth, as if he should haue saide, The braine is not made to be a particular instrument of sence, so as it can perceiue or apprehend colours onely as the eyes, sauours onely as the tongue, &c: But it is a common instrument of sen∣sation discerning colours, sauours, smels, sounds and tactile qualities; and in a word all sensible obiects.

Wherefore the braine feeleth vniuersally whatsoeuer is offered vnto it, not with choice as the eye which receiueth not the sound but onely his owne obiect and so in the rest. It

remayneth therefore that the Naturall sence of the braine is none at all or at least so weak and dull as it is hardly perceiued, for in his substance there is rather a faculty of Touching then an instrument of Touch.

Fernelius thinketh that all motion is from the marrow of the braine, and all sence from * 1.272 his membranes; because the body of the braine is perpetually moued but hath no feeling at all: on the other side, his membranes are of themselues immouable especially the Dura mater, but feele very exactly. So in the Lethargy or Phrensie which are diseases of the substance of the braine there is no paine at all, but if a sharp vapour or humour be raised vp vnto the Meninges, then grieuous paine followeth. Moreouer the spinall marrow and all the nerues haue their marrow from the braine & that couered with the Meninges, al which haue the same and no other power or faculty then what they receiued from their original. wherefore the forepart of the braine is the beginning of Sence, the hinder part of Motion, but of Touching the Meninges or Membranes are the originall. Those nerues which are full of marrow are the instruments of Motion; of Touching, those whose greater parts are produced by the Meninges. And this is Fernelius his Philosophy concerning this poynt, but how consonant to reason we shall see afterward.

Concerning the motion of the braine great difference there is among Authors. Galen in his 8. booke of the Vse of Parts and the second Chapter, sayth it hath perpetuall motion. * 1.273 Vesalius denies it, answeres his arguments & addeth that he could neuer perceiue any such * 1.274 motion either in great woundes of the head, or which is more in his dissections of liuing Creatures. Fallopius halteth in this poynt, he sayes it but hee dares not auouch it.

Platerus thinks that those that say it moues, mistake the motion of the braine for the mo∣tion of the third Sinus, which beateth like an artery. Columbus, Archangelus and Laurenti∣us, doe all consent that it moueth continually; and instance in woundes of the head. Lau∣rentius * 1.275 is so confident that he sayth he is a mad man and wants his sences that will deny it. To resolue vpon somewhat among so many opinions, we think; that the braine is not mo∣ued by any Animall or voluntary motion, but by a Naturall and that double: one proper of his owne, another from the arteries, albeit this last Archangelus doth deny, because those * 1.276 arteries that runne aboue are too small, but those that are in the bottom of the brain much lesse, yet it giueth the power of voluntary motion to other parts.

This motion is proper and peculiar to the braine, for the generation, nourishment and expurgation of the Animall spirit, for it is dilated and againe constringed as may be seene * 1.277 in wounds of the head where a notable part of the Scull is taken away, as also of the mem∣branes sayth Bauhine. And in children new borne in the mould, the braine is so manifestly * 1.278 seene to beate and pant, that euen the bones which at that time are very soft are mooued therewith. When it is dilated it draweth out of the Sinus of the dura mater (some say out of the wonderful net or web of the soporarte arteries) vitall spirits and ayre by the nosthrils, for the restauration and preseruation of the Animall spirites, & when it contracteth it selfe it driueth out the Animall spirits laboured in his substance through the nerues, as through * 1.279 pipes and canals into the organs of sence and motion, or as Archangelus hath it out of the foreward ventricles being contracted into the third and fourth, and so into the organs a∣foresaide: which spirites when they ariue in the particular parts they nourish the Animall spirits bred and fixed in those partes. For the Animall spirit floweth through the nerues into all the parts, not onely to be the conuayer of the sensatiue and mouing Soule, but also to giue nourishment to the Animall spirits fixed in the parts; and this spirit is the medium or Meane by which the Sensatiue Soule and al his faculties which are incorporeal are ioy∣ned with the body. The outward parts because their instruments are farther off, stood in neede of nerues as it were Channels through which the Animall spirites accompanied by the Vital as it were by guides might be conuaied, but the inward parts because their instru∣ments are neare and at hand needed no nerues, but receiue the same by blind and inuisible by-waies yet guided by the same Vital spirits.

We haue also sayd that at the entrance into and at the out-gate from the heart there are * 1.280 certain Values or floud-gates set, and their vses wee haue allotted. Now Archangelus is of opinion that the Buttocks and Pine-glandule of the Braine doe here the same offices that the values did in the heart. For sayth he, in the dilatation of the braine the way out of the third ventricle into the fourth closeth it selfe, and beside is shut vp by the glandule falling betweene the Buttocks, that no part of the spirits can returne out of the fourth ventricle in∣to the third. On the contrary, in the contraction the glandule is lifted vp and the Buttocks

are diuided, and so away is made for the Animall spirit to flow out of the third ventricle into the fourth.

Concerning the generation of Animall spirits there are diuers opinions; especially * 1.281 seauen, one of Galen, another of Vesalius, a third of Columbus, a fourth of Argenterius, a fift of Archangelus, a sixt of Laurentius, and a seaueth of Varolius, to which Bauhine our au∣thor subscribeth.

Galens opinion was, that they were made of the vitall spirite brought by the soporarie ar∣teries * 1.282 and of ayre breathed in, mary as for the place of their generation he seemeth to be al∣together vncertaine; for sometimes hee assigneth the Plexus Choroides, sometimes the ven∣tricles, sometimes the substance and body of the braine.

Vesalius sayeth they are laboured in the right and left ventricle by a power and efficacy * 1.283 receiued from the brain, and haue for their matter vitall spirits from the heart, & aire drawn in by inspiration ascending through the third ventricle.

Columbus sayth they are made of ayre drawne by the nosethrils and altered in the caui∣ties * 1.284 of the forehead bone and the wedge-bone, and carried through the pores of the spon∣gy bone to the forward ventricles where it meeteth with the vitall spirit sent vpward from the hart by the soporarie arteries, & powred into the Plexus choroides which is in the ventri∣cles; both which spirits and ayre, sayth he, by the perpetuall motion of the braine and this Plexus Choroides are exactly mingled, and of them the Animall spirits are generated in that Plexus Choroides which is in the ventricles, and this he sayth was his owne inuention.

Argenterius will haue but one influent or moouable spirite besides the fixed spirites of * 1.285 the particular partes, whose arguments shall be sufficiently answered in our Controuersies by Laurentius.

Archangelus opinion is, that the Animall spirits are made of the vitall, changed by ma∣ny * 1.286 exagitations and alterations by the arteries which make the Rete mirabile and the Plex∣us Choroides, but receiuing his vttermost perfection in and by the substance of the Braine, & so becommeth a conuenient vehicle of the sensatiue soule. The processe of which gene∣ration he sayth is after this manner. There is an inchoation or beginning made in the Rete¦mirabile, but the plenarie perfection is in the Plexus Choroides, yet that from a power or fa∣cultie of the marrow of the braine in which alone such power resideth; being so perfected they are powred out into the ventricles (which adde nothing to their generation) as into store-houses or places of receyte where they are kept to bee transported into the whole body.

Laurentius thus, the Animall spirit is generated of the vitall spirit and the aire breathed * 1.287 in; whose preparation is in the labyrinthian webs of the small arteries, & in the vpper or for∣ward ventricles; but they receiue a farther elaboration in the third ventricle and their per∣fection in the fourth, and from thence by the nerues are diffused into the whole body: but he reprehendeth those that auouch that this spirit receiueth his forme and specificall diffe∣rence in the webs before named.

Finally Varolius and with him Bauhine and wee with them will resolue, first for their mat∣ter that it is arterial bloud aboundantly fulfilled with vitall spirits and ayre drawn in by the * 1.288 nosethrils; for the manner wee say it is thus. The spirituous and thin bloud is sent vp from the heart by the soporarie arteries vnto the braine, and is powred out into the Sinus of the dura mater whilest they are dilated as is venall bloud out of the veins. With this is mingled ayre drawne by inspiration through the nosethrilles, and ariuing into the braine through the pores of the spongy bone. These substances thus mingled and mixed in the vesselles, * 1.289 whilest they are carried through the conuolutions of the Braine are altered and prepared, purged also from phlegmatick excrement, which whilst it nourisheth the braine, the more subtile part is transfused into his substance, and there, that is, in the marrowy substance of the braine, it is laboured into a most subtile Animall spirite, and so is from thence by the same passages returned and communicated to the spinall marrow and to the nerues of the whole body. Neither saith Varolius is it necessary that these spirits should haue any caui∣ties to be laboured in; and hee sheweth it by an example. When wee shut one eye the Animall spirit in a moment returneth vnto the other, so that it dilateth the ball or pupill of the other, and yet is there no manifest passage between them, sauing those insensible po••••s which are in euery nerue and also in the substance of the braine. And hereunto subscri∣beth also Platerus on this manner: the common opinion saith he, is that the Animall spi∣rit is generated and contayned in the Plexus Choroides, which I cannot approue as well be∣cause * 1.290

these vesselles are so very small, as also because so many excrements of the braine fall through the ventricles. I thinke therefore that the Animall spirit is tyed to the substance of the braine, so that the braine is neuer without Animall spirites, neither can the Animall spirites subsist in any part without the substance of the braine: for what else is the inward substance of euery Nerue but a kinde of production of the braine compassed about with a production also of the membranes of the same.

And thus much shall be sufficient to haue sayed concerning the vse of the Braine and the generation of the Animall spirit. Now wee proceede to the After-braine or the Cere∣bellum.

CHAP. XIIII. Of the Cerebellum or After-braine.

THat the whole Masse of the Braine is diuided into the Braine & After-braine we haue already shewed. The cause of this diuision Varollius taketh to be this. Whereas of those things which are apprehended by the senses there are two chiefe, differing much the one from the other yet both of them so immedi∣ately seruiceable to the vnderstanding that they cannot be substituted one for the other; wherof one belongeth to the Sight the other to the Hearing; and because there * 1.291 is required to the perfection of sight the mediation of a moist and waterish body as we see in the eyes; therefore for their behoofe especially and of the visible Species which they admit, that part of the braine was made which is the softer and so great that it filleth al∣most the whole Scull; and this is called properly Cerebrum or the Braine. But because those Species which are apprehended by sound, or resounding; do require a kinde of drines in their Organ, as Hippocrates excellently acknowledgeth (for where there is only moysture there is little or no resonance at all): therefore vnder the braine in the backepart of the head there is ordained and scituated a lesser and faster portion which they call Cerebellum we the After-braine which as it is truely harder then the braine it selfe, so is it consequent∣ly dryer. And this is Galens opinion in the 6. chapter of his 8. booke de vsu partium where * 1.292 he saith; that therefore it is harder then the braine because it produceth hard Nerues; albe∣it Vesalius, Columbus and Archangelus wil not admit any difference in their substances. * 1.293 Wherefore the Braine it selfe was especially made for the behoofe of the eyes, & theyr obiects: the After-braine for the vse of resounding species or such things as were to bee * 1.294 represented to the hearing. And because the sight is more excellent then the hearing, ministring vnto vs more difference of things, therefore it is seated aboue the braine.

The Cerebellum or After-braine, called in Greeke 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and by Aristotle 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is after the Braine; is as it were a priuate and small Braine scituated in the backe and lower part of the scull vnder the Braine [Tab. 11. fig. 8. ^{R R}] from which it is separated: it is also couered with both the Meninges or Membranes, and is vnited to the spinal mar∣row for a little space where also it affoordeth a part out of it selfe to make the bulke of the same narrow. * 1.295

In brute Beasts it is round and acuminated or growing sharpe and taketh vp almost all the backpart of the head. It is continuated on eyther hand to the sides of the Braine by two orbicular or round portions: [Table 11, fig. 8. neare ^{H G}.] But to the spinall marrow it is ioyned in the very middest, yet toward the backside, [Table 12, fig. 9. ^•] by the interpositi∣on of the Pia mater: And because the fourth ventricle should not there start open it is com∣passed with the thinne Membrane which is spred as farre as to the Buttocks. [Table 11, fig. 8. betwixt ^{O P} and ^Q] It is separated from the braine that through the thicke Membrane the vessels might be securely conueyed into the depth of the braine.

The forme of it is broader then long or deepe, and in the lower and backpart it resem∣bleth a flat bowle, in the middest whereof there is a sharpe impression ietting out from the * 1.296 bunch of the Nowle-bone; forward toward the buttocks of the braine it runs into a sharpe wedge hauing that figure because the place will admit no other.

It consisteth of three parts, the right, the left, and the middle (which yet are not diuided * 1.297 but continuated) because of the bunch of the Nowle-bone, of which we shall speake more particularly heereafter.

The right and the left parts are like two bowles set together, [Table. 12, fig, 9. ^{B D}] in the middest of which where the bowels do not touch, is placed the third part which is rounde and runneth as it were into a Ring from before backward, & maketh those processes which are called vermiculares. By reason of these parts it hath three-fold impressions, some ouer∣thwart

[illustration]

Table 14. figure 18. Sheweth the Head on the left side somwhat raised from the right side, as also a part of the Brain (the Af∣ter-Braine being remooued) remaining, and a little eleuated and reflected backeward, that the Instruments of smelling might be discerned.

[illustration]

Figure 19. sheweth the Head set vpon the Nowle, that a porti∣on of the Braine hanging backward, the Organs of smelling, the coition or meeting of the Optick Nerues and the Sopora∣ry Arteries might better appeare.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XIIII.

[illustration]

FIG. XVIII.

[illustration]

XIX.

• AA, BB, the brain couerd with the pia mater.
• CC. The swellings of the braine called by some Mamillary processes.
• D, One of the organs of smelling remaining yet in his owne seate.
• E. The other togither with the braine refle∣cted backward.
• F, the sinus: of the left organ of smelling co∣uered here with the thick meninx perforated
• G, The partition of the organs of smelling.
• H. The sixt veine of the braine deriued into the dura meninx.
• I. The fift veine of the braine which goeth into the scull through the hole, ordained for the issuing out of the Nerues of the 5 coniugation.
• K. A part of the Syth groing to the partitiō
• L M N. The place or seate of the Cerebellum or After-brain.
• O P Q. The right, left and middle Sinus of the Dura meninx.
• SSS. The double Tabulature of the scull.

[illustration]

Figure 19.

• AA, BB. A portion of the braine couered with the pia mater.
• CC. Those swellings of the brain which are called the Mamillary processes.
• D, E. The organs of smelling reflected togi∣ther with the braine.
• FFFF. The two vpper shew the bosomes of the scull in which the Mamillary proces∣ses do rest, the two lower shewe the bo∣soms or cauities of the organs of smelling
• G. A partition distinguishing these organes and their bosomes or cauities.
• H. the 6 veine doth here enter into the scull.
• I. The fift veine of the braine.
• K. A vessell like a veine running out of the dura meninx into the Tenuis.
• LL. The beginning of those passages which run by the sides of the dura moninx ioynd to the arteries after the maner of Veines.
• M N. The right and left optick nerues.
• O. Their coition or coniunction.
• P. A branch of the Soporary artery, perfo∣rating the Dura Meninx at the side of the Tunnell.
• Q. A branch of the Arterie reaching to the right ventricle.
• R. Another branch going to the Pia mater.
• S. The Tunnel receyuing the Phlegm of the braine.

and scored along through it; others running right downeward which are ioyned on eyther side as it were vnto a Center. For the lynes it hath are long and almost superficia∣ry, yet diuided manifold and distinguished by the thin membrane running betwixt them. * 1.298 The reason why they runne in the superficies or surface only is, because if they did descend deeper as we see in the Conuolutions of the Braine it selfe, they would perforate the Ce∣rebellum euen vnto the ventricle. They are also manifolde that their plenty might sup∣ply * 1.299 their superficiall course; as for those long and winding contortions which are in the braine, in this After-braine they are not to be found.

The substance of it is almost the same with the substance of the Braine it selfe, if wee take it freed from the Pia mater, excepting in the Basis of the Braine where the spinall mar∣row beginneth, which is harder then all the other parts, yea then the After-braine it selfe. For * 1.300

[illustration]

Table 15. Figure 20. sheweth the head turned vppon the Eare, that the inner Basis of the Skull couered with the dura Meninx might be seene, there is also so much of the Braine and spinall marrow left, as serueth to exhibite the coniugations of the nerues of the Braine.

[illustration]

Figure 21. sheweth the After-braine taken out of the Skull, separated from the spinall marrow, and lying with the lower side vpward: from which also the wormy processes are seuered.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XV.

[illustration]

FIG. XX.

[illustration]

XXI.

• AA, a part of the marrow of the braine, together with the beginning of the spinall marrow.
• BB, a portion of the opticke nerues.
• CC, the Tunnel receiuing the phlegme
• D, a hole out of the third ventricle into the Tunnell.
• EF, branches of the soporarie arteries, at∣taining vnto the skul near the Tunnel.
• G, the second paire of nerues moouing the eies.
• H, the third coniugation, or the greater roote of the third coniugation.
• I, the third paire of nerues, after some the fourth.
• K, the fourth paire of the braine.
• L, the lesser roote of the fift paire.
• M, the fift paire of nerues of the braine.
• N, the beginning and surcles of the sixt paire of nerues.
• O, the beginning of the seuenth paire of nerues.

[illustration]

Figure 21.

• AB, the right and left part of the After-braine.
• CD, the anterior and posterior regions of the middle part of the After-braine.
• E, the anterior wormy processe.
• F, the posterior wormy processe.
• GG, In this place the After-braine did grow to the spinall marrow.
• H, the cauity of the After-braine which with the cauity in the spinall marrow maketh the fourth ventricle.
• IK, the anterior and posterior processes of the braine, called vermi-formes or the wormy processes.

For this spinall marrow neither in colour nor in hardnesse is answerable to the Cerebellum, because the After-braine is yellower or rather more Ash-coloured, being no where white but in the surface of his ventricle; but the spinall marrow is exceeding white, as also is the Basis of the Braine which giueth beginning vnto it.

The quantity of the After-braine is much lesse then that of the Braine. The Braine be∣ing * 1.301 as sayth Fallopius foure times, as Vesalius would haue it, tenne times as bigge as the Ce∣rebellum.

In the middest thereof it hath a broad Sinus or hollownesse not very deepe, which ma∣keth * 1.302 as it were the roofe or vpper side of the fourth ventricle, for the rest of it is couered with the thin membrane; [Table 15. fig. 21. ^H] with in ward it hath no cauities as hath the braine, because it neither aboundeth with so many excrements, and those it doth gather, it easily turneth downe on the out side.

It hath two processes (Platerus reckons foure) [Table 15. figu. 21. CD] which because * 1.303 they are like to wormes in rotten wood, Galen in the 14. Chapter of his 8. Book de vsu par∣tium calleth vermi-formes excrescentias, VVormy processes, one of which regardeth the * 1.304 foreside, the other the back of that ventricle which is common to the After-braine and the

spinall marrow. These processes are diuersly orbiculated or rowled vp, consisting of ma∣ny particles, not oblique or right but transuerse, coupled together by the pia mater or thin membrane, whose end or top is embowed and thinne (which Aurantius calleth the pease) and entreth the cauity which they call the Cisterne, yea into the fourth ventricle.

* 1.305 Archangelus maketh this wormy processe not as Galen would haue it, to be of the sub∣stance * 1.306 of the braine and a part thereof, but a long membranous body, being indeede no∣thing else but the pia mater corrugated or foulded together, which in the dilatation of the braine is necessarily extended: but in the contraction is corrugated or crumpled vp like a worme.

For because (sayeth hee) the braines of those that die are contracted and fall into them∣selues, it necessarily followes that after death the membrane must in that part bee contrac∣ted.

It appeareth also thicker then otherwise the crumpled membrane would, because be∣ing scituated in a low part, it receiueth the moysture there collected and encreafeth with that additament. VVherefore sayth he the worme as it is a worme is of no vse at all. But to returne.

VVe sayde these wormy processes were two, the first which lyeth on the forepart [tab 15. figure 21. C] neare the buttocks is thought by Galen in the 5. Chapter of his 9. Booke * 1.307 of Anatomicall Administrations, to keepe open the passage of the third ventricle into the fourth; albeit Vesalius taxeth Galen for assigning that vse vnto it. Galen also in the 14. chap∣ter of his 8. Booke de vsu partium sayth further, that this processe when it is extended ouer the foresaid passage doth wholly obstruct or stop the same; but if it be reflected backward * 1.308 and rowled vp, his imbowed parts do draw the membrane to them adioyned, and the pas∣sage is so farre opened as way is made by that retraction. For as it is reflected and rowled round, by howe much the length of it is diminished by so much the breadth is encreased; wherefore it behoued not, that these processes should be either too thicke or too thin: not too thicke, for then they could not haue exactly closed the passages because they should haue had no slender parts which might haue insinuated themselues into the narrow straits of the passages. Againe, if they had beene too thin, the passages before said could neither haue bin exactly shut nor well opened.

And least these processes should altogether fall into the passages, Nature hath on ey∣ther side bound and conioyned them to the buttockes with slender bodies which the Ana∣tomists call Tendines proceeding from the thinne membrane; which membrane being ex∣tended to the hinde-most ventricle maketh the end of this processe. And this is Galens Anatomy concerning these processes, and deserueth well to beconsidered of, especially if we make our dissection of the head after the ordinary and accustomed manner.

The other processe [table 15. fig. 21. FD] which is the hinder, and from behinde incli∣neth * 1.309 forward, doeth not beare out as the former did, but his poynt is rather hid in the sub∣stance of the Sinus of the After-braine.

The vse of the first is to vsher the spirits; of the second that the way or passage of the fourth ventricle (which Galen in the 11. 12. and 13. Chapters of his 8. Book de vsu partium calleth the ventricle of the Cerebellum) might not be obstructed by the After-braine pres∣sing * 1.310 vpon it. But we are of opinion that this is the common vse of both the processes, be∣cause this passage (so often now mentioned out of the third into the fourth vētricle) ought neuer to be shut but to remaine alwayes open that the Animall spirit might haue perpetu∣all free insluence into the spinall marrow. Platerus thinkes that this vse is common to all the foure processes (for hereckoneth foure.) But Vesalius assigneth to them no other mo∣tion or office then to the rest of the substance of the Cerebellum, but if you aske his reason, I thinke it was onely that he might gain-say Galen.

At the sides of these processes we meet with two other portions which are continuated to the spinall marrow [table 15. fig. 21. GG.]

The vse of the After-braine (as saith Galen in the 6. Chapter of his 8. Book de vsu par∣tium) is that from it the harder nerues might haue their originall: which notwithstanding Vesalius and Columbus doe deny. Archangelus and Platerus esteeme it to be of the same na∣ture * 1.311 with the braine and adorned with the same faculties. Galen thinketh that the Ani∣mall spirit being contained in the whole substance of the braine, not only in the ventricles thereof, is in great quantity treasured vp in this After-braine, as being to be the original of all the sinewes which were to bee distributed into the whole body: and that those mid∣dle

distances which tye together the parts heereof; are the paths and wayes wherein the Animall spirits disport themselues.

Finally, Varolius conceiueth, (which we partly touched before) that the Braine was e∣specially * 1.312 made for the eyes and the visible obiects. The After-braine for the eares and re∣semblances of sounds to be conueyed vnto them.

CHAP. XV. Of the spinall Marrow or pith of the Backe.

THE name of Marrow is properly attributed to that substance which is sim∣ple and vniforme, moist, fat, white, without sense contained in the Cauity of * 1.313 bones and hath his original from the bloud; which through the veines slideth by secret pores and passages into their hollownesse or spungy sides. It be∣commeth white and as it were spermaticall by a mutation it receiueth from the bones, because in them it is stored to be their proper nourishment and to refresh them when they are heated and dryed by motion or other violent causes.

But of this marrow we do not intreat at this time: the name is improperly giuen to the Braine also and the pith of the Backe: For the Braine it selfe is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 me∣dulla * 1.314 cerebralis the Marrow of the Braine, because saith Plato the substance thereof is mar∣rowye, although there be great difference betweene them, for that it will not melt and consume as marrow doth, and beside is inuested or clothed with both Membranes the thicke and the thin meninx.

Moreouer to distinguish it from ordinary marrow, it is called by Galen 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Spinalis. By Hippocrates in his book de Carnibus, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Dorsalis, by others Ceruicalis and Lumbaris, * 1.315 because it descendeth through the Neck, the Backe and the Loynes, and filleth the whole spine or Ridge-bone.

Now there is a double acceptation of the Spinall marrow, for in the larger signification it signifieth the whole marrow of the Brain lengthened out, one part wherof is yet contai∣ned in the Scull, [Tab. 17, fig. 1. from^D to^E] the other continuall with the former yssueth at * 1.316 the great hole of the Nowle-bone and descendeth to the very end of the ridge. [Tab. 16. fig. 1. from^A to^H]

But in a strict & more proper acceptation it betokeneth that part of the marrow which without the Scull is contayned in all the racke-bones or vertebrae of the spine or chine. [ta. 16. fig. 1. is an expresse Image of it] Wherefore that it may bee free from all ambiguity, the history thereof is on this manner.

That which is commonly called the Braine, that is, the whole substance included with∣in the Scull we haue diuided into the Shell and the Kernell or Marrow. For these two differ in colour and consistence. That which on euery side compasseth the marrow is Ash-coloured; * 1.317 the marrow it selfe is white and of a more solid, fast and compacted substance: and these two parts in greene or fresh heads are distinguished by many oblique lines, so that with a raysor they may be separated if a man haue a steddy and cunning hand, yet not without breaking both the substances; so that Archangelus said well, that the white was drowned in the Ash-coloured as the christalin humor of the eye is in the glassie; and as the * 1.318 glassie humor is esteemed to be the Aliment of the christaline, so the Ash-coloured sub∣stance may well be thought to be the foode of the white, because the Ash-coloured ap∣peareth so to be by reason of innumerable veines disseminated through it.

The marrow it selfe may be said to be double, one Globous or round, the other Long. The Globous part which is like the figure of the Scull, is of a great bulke and therein are * 1.319 ventricles excauated or hollowed. At this and continuall with it hangeth the other cal∣led Cerebellum of which we haue intreated in the Chapter going before according to the receiued opinion of Anatomists.

The Long marrow of the Braine which is like a Pith or staffe may bee diuided into that part which is contained within the Scull, and that which is yssued out which properly is * 1.320 called the spinall marrow; although some there are that giue this name vnto all the Long marrow of the Braine as well within the Scull as without; and this is it of which wee now speake.

The Spinall Marrow therefore according to this large signification taketh his begin∣ning * 1.321 (as Galen saith in the tenth chapter of his 8. book de vsu partium) from the backe ven∣tricle of the Braine; for he thought it nothing else but the Braine lengthened, which may seeme to agree with the Scripture which calleth it The siluer cord. And this, hee saith in the * 1.322

twelfth chapter of the former book, is continuated onely with the Braine at the Basis ther∣of.

There be many opinions of the originall of this spinall marrow, we will reckon vnto you the most notable.

* 1.323 The first is that of Hippocrates in his booke de Carnibus, where he saith in general words that it ariseth from the Braine. Galen more particularly and distinctly from the hinder ven∣tricle of the Braine. The common opinion is that it ariseth out of the Cerebellum or Af∣ter-braine. Vesalius saies from the Basis or foundation of the Braine. Archangelus from the Globous part of the marrow of the Braine, betwixt the Braine it selfe and the Cerebel∣lum; for those that say it hath a double beginning say as much as nothing. Platerus think∣eth that it proceedeth like a new Long Braine from the Basis of the other and receiueth increase of strength from the Cerebellum also. Columbus saith it is nothing else but a Long * 1.324 Braine hauing a double beginning, the one greater from the braine it selfe, the other lesser from the after braine. The beginning it hath from the braine is but single, that it hath from the after-braine is double and as it were forked into a right and a left. The greater originall is from the forepart of the braine but a little distant from the Region of the Op∣ticke sinewes, and therefore, saith he, I am constrained to confesse that the 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. paires of sinewes do not arise from the braine but from the spinall marrow.

Varollius who indeed was excellent in dissecting of the head saith, that there yssue from the braine and the Cerebellum foure roots making one notable trunke which they call the * 1.325 spinall marrow, out of which do yssue Nerues deriued vnto all the parts of the body. Lau∣rentius is also of the same opinion. The truth is, that it is a production as well of the braine it selfe as of the after-braine out of which it proceedeth as a stemme from the roote, which * 1.326 we shall more particularly shew afterward.

This spinall marrow lying vnder the Cerebellum to which it is continewed, taketh vp * 1.327 that hollownes of the Scull which is aboue the great perforation or hole in the bone of the Nowle or backpart of the head; and the beginning thereof for the length of foure fingers * 1.328 breadth cleaueth to the braine within the Scull, [Table 17, fig. 1. from^D to^F] the latitude and depth of that originall are so aequall that it appeareth almost circular neere the quan∣tity and forme of an Hens Egge as Archangelus saith; and from this originall those Nerues which are accounted the proper sinewes of the braine together with the Organs of smel∣ling are produced and deriued into the Instrument of the fiue senses as Varollius, Plater, Ar∣changelus, Laurentius, and Dominicus do ioyntly agree.

But the spinall marrow properly so called or the other part of it which is continuall with the former [Table 16, fig. 1.] is wholy without the Scull. For when the marrow of * 1.329 the braine now lengthened attaineth vnto the great perforation in the Nowle-bone [Tab. 13, fig. 17.^H] it discendeth and passeth along through the holes of the racke-bones euen to the end of the os sacrum or holy bone. It passeth I say through the bones themselues, least being soft and like the substance of the braine as Galen speaketh, it should in the length * 1.330 of his production suffer violence by those things which might light vpon it, whereas now the bones are as it were a safe conduct and firme defence thereunto all the way that it pas∣seth.

* 1.331 And hence it is, that the Graecians call this perforated part of the spine, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 sa∣cram fistulam the holy pipe. Sacred or holy because it containeth a principall part, and a pipe because it is as it were fistulated or bored, through which Cauity such a substance is transported as where from all the other Nerues are produced.

It is inuested or clothed with three membranes which Hippoc. in his booke de Arte calleth 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. The first of which, according to Galen, arisieth from a strong ligament exactly faste∣ning * 1.332 the foreparts of the vertebrae or rackebones, which ligament in the backpart determi∣neth into a Neruous and strong coate, least in the bending or extention of the spine it should be broken or offended by the bones; because it is contained not as the braine in any immouable bone, but in rack-bones, which are not only moued but also sometimes some∣what dislocated. Wherefore the Nerues also which arise from the spinall marrow pro∣perly so called (least they should bee offended by the hardnes of the bones through which they passe) are clothed beside the two Menings with this third coate also.

About this is a thicke and slimy humor powred, as also about all the ioynts and parts * 1.333 that were to be moued; least being ouer dried they should suffer paine, and so their actions or functions be interrupted; which wisedome of Nature men doe imitate when about the

Axle-trees of Carts and Coaches they smeare a soft and viscous grease that they might more currantly moue.

The second membrane ariseth from the dura mater or hard Meninx; the third from * 1.334 the pia mater or thinne Meninx [Tab. 16. figure 1. expresseth the coates ioyned together] which two are not separated as they bee in the braine: moreouer the thicker secureth the marrow from the bones, the thinner infoldeth his vessels and closely bindeth together his soft substance, for through the thinne membrane the veines and arteries which nourish * 1.335 the marrow and supply it with vitall spirites are conuayed; which vesselles we haue obser∣ued to proceede from the veines and arteries of the loynes as wee haue already shewed in the third Booke.

The substance of this spinall marrow is all one with that of the Basis of the braine, or rather of the globus marrow. VVherefore it is somewhat hard, compacted and white, yet * 1.336 so that it is much harder then the braine it selfe. And Galen in diuers places of his ninth * 1.337 Booke de vsu partium sayth, that this spinall marrow is the originall of the harder nerues, as the forepart of the braine is of the softer: for to the strength of motion a harder producti∣on was more behoofefull; and for the exactnes of sence a softer. Note againe that the fur∣ther it is distant from the braine, by so much it is harder and more compact; neither is it answerable to the colour and hardnes of the Cerebellum. For the Cerebellum or After-brain is onely white in the surface of his ventricle, other-where it is yellowish or Ash-coloured; but the spinall marrow is very white most like to the marrow of the braine, sauing that it is without any contortions or conuolutions, because it is made onely to receiue and not fur∣ther to labour that it hath receiued.

VVith the Braine it hath these things common; first his substance; secondly that it is an * 1.338 originall of sinewes (Ga. addeth of all sinewes) and is compassed with both the Meninges. Yet heerein they say it doeth not communicate with it, because the braine (though it bee contayned within an immouable bone) yet beateth and is moued; wheras this marrow al∣beit be contayned within mouable spondels or rack-bones is not it selfe at all moued. But if that motion bee in the substance of the braine by an in-bred faculty, and the spinall mar∣row hath the same nature and substance that the braine hath, me thinks it should bee reaso∣nable that this marrow should be moued in like manner as the braine is moued, albeit our sence is not apprehensiue of it. And truely Archangelus conceiueth that it hath a moti∣on, and when it is dilated receiueth Animall spirits from the fourth ventricle, and when it is contracted powreth them againe forth into the nerues which arise there-from.

The figure of it is long, thicke and large at the originall, [Table 17. figure 1. from^D to * 1.339 ^• tab. 16. fig. 2. from^A to^B] and though being gathered together it become somewhat nar∣rower, yet is it not (as some thinke) by little and little continually attenuated till it come to the extremity of the os sacrum: for as far as the vertebrae of the loynes [table 16. fig. 1. from ^• to^•] it keepeth an equall thicknesse almost; although Galen and Vesalius did thinke that it was consumed as it sent more nerues out from it. Fallopius in his obseruations and Platerus doe not thinke that it groweth lesse at all. Yet we must needes acknowledge that we find it fuller & thicker in the neck whence those great nerues issue which are dispersed through the armes, [Table 16. fig. 1. from^I to^K] and in the loynes whence proceede the great nerues of the loynes which descend vnto the thighes; [tab. 16. fig. 1. from^B to^C] and that afterward when it commeth nearer to the os sacrum his marrowy substance is somewhat abated.

A cauity or Sinus there is formed in it presently after his originall whilest it yet remai∣neth * 1.340 within the Skull; which is like a writing pen, and therefore it is called Calamus scripto∣torius [Table 12. fig. 10.^MNO] for it is hollowed into a poynt or neb becomming lesse by de∣grees, because in that place there are no more excrements.

This cauity maketh the middle part of the fourth ventricle of the braine; for the rest of the ventricle is formed by the After-braine [table 15. figure 21.^H] at which place the After-braine is ioyned to this marrow. [Table 15. fig. 21.^GG is ioyned to^BC as also in the 12. tab. and fig. 10.] Archangelus conceiueth that this cauity is vnder the fourth ventricle and con∣tinued * 1.341 with it, and that out of the fourth ventricle into it the Animall spirits doe flow, and that from this cauity they are distributed most what into all the fiue sences.

And although the marrow be but single and seemeth to haue no manifest cauity, yet in the very middest it is deuided into two parts by the thinne Meninx as far as to the rack-bones of the loynes; so that on either side there appeareth a little cauity which may not onely be demonstrated in the marrow of an Oxe if it bee lightly boyled, but also as sayeth

[illustration]

Table 16. Figure 1. sheweth the true forme of the spinall marrow properly so called, toge∣ther with his membranes & the nerues proceeding from the same.

[illustration]

Figure 2. sheweth the spinal marrow naked & bare, as it appeareth both within the Skull & without, together with his nerues as most part of the Anatomistes heretofore haue described it.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XVI

[illustration]

FIG. II.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

• A, The beginning of the spinall marrowe where it fals out of the skull.
• B, the thicknesse thereof in the spondels or rack-bones of the loynes.
• C, the diuision thereof into strings, or hairy threds.
• D, the seauen nerues of the necke.
• From D to E or from 7, to 19, shewe the nerues of the backe.
• From E to F, the nerues of the loynes,
• From F to G, the nerues of the os sacrum or holy bone.
• H, the end of the marrow.
• I K L, doe shew howe the nerues doe yssue from the marrow in strings.
• MM, the knots of the sinewes made of the coniunction of those strings.
• N O, the membranes that inuest the mar∣row.

[illustration]

Figure 2.

• A, the beginning of the spinall marrow in the skull.
• 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. These Characters shew (accor∣ding to Vesalius opinion) how the cōiu∣gations of the nerues of the braine doe take their originall from the marrow re∣mayning yet within the skull.
• B, the egresse of the spinall marrow out of the skull.
• C, the cords or strings whereinto it is diui∣ded.
• D 7, the marrow of the neck and seuen paire of sinewes.
• E 19 twelue pairs or coniugations of nerues proceeding from the marrowe of the Chest.
• F 24, the marrow of the loynes and 5. paire of sinewes.
• G 30, the marrow of the holy-bone and 6, paire of sinewes.
• H, the extremity or end of the spinall mar∣row.

Platerus in a mans, because it may bee parted asunder without laceration. Archangelus thinks this cauity to be sufficiently manifest to the eye; we are sure to the vnderstanding it is most apparant, by that we finde in those that are troubled with the Palsie, in whome some∣times one side sometimes another is alone affected. Howsoeuer the marrow appearing simple and vndeuided passeth through the whole necke and the Chest euen vnto the loines and lower; [Tab. 16. fig. 1. from ^A to ^B] and in his passage it scattereth nerues out of his sides: afterward, that is, at the rest of the loynes it is no more simple but deuided into many smal threds and filaments, very much resembling a horse tayle and so runneth on to the end of the os sacrum. For as it began with the spine (wee meane the marrow properly so called) so it determineth therewith, sometimes simple sometimes deuided into three short surcles. For * 1.342 it was necessary that in that part where the spine was especially curued or bent backward or forward, it should be diuersly diuided that it might not be compressed by the vertebrae. Hence the reason appeareth why a hurt or annoyance in the lower part of the spinall mar∣row is worse and more dangerous then in the vpper, because below it is more Neruous a∣boue more marrowy.

Now although the Nerues yssuing from the spinall marrow be almost infinite, yet ac∣cording * 1.343 to the number of the out-lets or holes of the vertebrae they are said to be so many coniugations as the vertebrae haue holes. For euery Nerue doth indeed consist of many hairy strings or marrowy fibres, which by the helpe of the Membranes at the holes of the

vertebrae are conioyned and making as it were a knot do yssue outof the bone; so that one Nerue seemeth to be made of one propagation, [Table 16. the first figure sheweth it at ^{L L}] which thing as it is true in those Nerues which proceede out of the Marrow whilest it is simple and angle, so is it also in them which after the diuision are distributed into the lo∣wer parts. [Table 16, fig. 1, at ^{M M}]

To put an end to our discription of the spinall marrow, we will take leaue to insert in this placea description therof out of Rondeletius and Laurentius which is on this manner * 1.344 All the Nerues, (saith Rondeletius) which no man before me hath obserued, are diuided frō the very beginning of the spinall marrow in the Brain. Wherfore the cause of the Paralysis or Palsie doth not so much proceed from the marrow of the backe as from the very heads of the sinewes; & thence it is that Galen so often repeareth that the Palsie hapneth when the heads of the sinewes are eyther obstructed or resolued. Thus Rondeletius hath it in his chap. of the Palsie. Laurentius thus: All Anatomies haue hitherto beene ignorant of the origi∣nall and propagation of the Nerues of the spinall marrow; for they al thinke that the nerues * 1.345 of the necke come onely from the marrow of the necke; the nerues of the backe from the marrow of the backe, and of the Loynes from the marrow of the Loynes. But how misera∣bly they haue bin mistakē, is conuinced by a new and vnheard of obseruation of mine own. Separate therefore the marrow from the rack-bones but keepe it whole, then take from it both the Membranes wherewith it is compassed, cast it into water and shake it a little, and you shall perceiue that the whole marrow from the top to the bottome is made of innu∣merable surcles and filaments, like a Horse tayle composed of infinite hayres; and that the * 1.346 nerues of os sacrum do arise from the same beginning with the nerues that are aboue. This new and admirable obseruation maketh plaine an obscure probleme, why, when the mar∣row of the neck is offended the motion of the thigh is sometimes taken away, when as the motion of the armes and of the Chest is not at al vitiated; thus far Laurentius. To conclude.

The vse of the spinall marrow properly so called, is saith Galen in his twelfth booke de vsu * 1.347 partium, that from it as from one other brain there should proceed many nerues as it were small riuerets which might conuey the Animall faculty, sense, motion and the Animall spi∣rit; which they receiue by continuation from the braine (to the parts vnder the head) excep∣ting those whereto are transmitted certaine propagations from the sixt payre [table 17 fig. 1, and 2, ^e] of the marrow of the braine, which also are disseminated through the middle and lower bellies. For, because it was no safe, in consideration of the length of the way, that all the nerues should be transported vnto the inferior parts from the marrow of the braine contained in the Scull; and yet it was necessary that those inferior parts should be supply∣ed with voluntary motion and sense to apprehend annoyances: it was most requisite that from this marrow, as from the braine elongated or produced, those sinewes should be deri∣ued; for if a man had wanted motion hee had beene more like an Image then a creature. And thus much of the vse of the marrow properly so called. But if you take it in the larger signification, then the vse of it is, that from it where it is included within the Scull on both sides should yssue seauen Coniugations or payres of nerues, (as is commonly thought) we say eight, which are called the nerues of the braine, [table 15, fig. 20, ^{• G H I K M N O}] together with the Organs of smelling. [table 14, fig. 19, ^{D •}] But as it consisteth in the spine without the Scul there are produced there-from thirty paire [table 16, fig. 1] euen al the nerues that passe through the whole body. And thus much of both the braines and the spinall mar∣row, now it followeth that we should intreat of the nerues yssuing there-from.

CHAP. XVI. Of the Nerues of the Braine, and first of the Organs of smel∣ling, called Processus Mammillares.

THE Nature of the Braine, the After-braine & the Spinall Marrow being thus manifested, it remaineth that we should speake of the Nerues proceeding frō * 1.348 each of them; and first of the Nerues of the braine. Whereas therefore there are fiue outward senses, the Sight, the Smell, the Hearing, the Taste and the Touching, which from the braine it selfe or rather from the Marrowe thereof doe receiue by nerues as it were by Channels some of them the faculty of Sensati∣on * 1.349 alone, some of them of Sensation and motion together, which nerues are sayed thence to arise as from a principle of dispensation & radication, from whence they bring the Sen∣satiue and mouing faculties of the Soule to the instruments of the Sences: it is very fit that in this place we should deliuer their history. Wee will therefore begin with the Organs of smelling. Although the Nose be the way & path of smels, yet is not the instrument of smel∣ling,

neither yet his bindmost coate; but farther within the skull there are certaine proces∣ses or productions esteemed for the very organs of this sence, which the Anatomists loo∣king onely vpon their prominent part haue called Processus mammillares, and some the or∣gans of smelling. Vnder which Title Galen hath written of them at large. These are two some thing like nerues but scituated in the Basis of the braine; they are whiter, softer and broader then nerues are Notwithstanding like nerues they are round and slender. In men they are very small; in beastes as Oxen, Goates, Sheepe and Dogges they are much larger; * 1.350 whence it is that all these Creatures haue this sence of Smelling more exquisite then men.

These processes arising out of the marrowey substance of the braine in his Basis [tab, 17

[illustration]

Tab. 17. Fig. 1. Sheweth the Basis of the Braine and After-braine freed from their membrane that the originall of the Nerues of the brain might be better perceiued.

[illustration]

Fig. 2. Sheweth one side of the Braine the After-brain, the spinall marrow and the Nerues.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XVII.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

• A A 1, 2. The braine.
• B B 1, 2, The After-braine.
• C C, 1, 2, the swellings of the braine which some call the mammillary processes.
• D, 1, the beginning of the spinal marow out of the Basis of the braine.
• E 1, 2, a part of the spinall marrowe when it is ready to yssue out of the skull.
• F F, 1, 2, the mammillary processes which serue for the sence of Smelling.
• G G 1, 2, the opticke nerues.
• H 1, the coition or vnion of the optick nerues.
• II 1, 2, the coate of the eye whereinto the optick nerue is extended.
• KK 1, 2, the second paire of sinewes ordained for the mo¦tion of the eyes.
• LL 1, 2, the third paire of sinewes, or according to most Anatomists the lesser roote of the third paire.
• MM 1, 2 the fourth paire of sinewes, or the greater root of the third paire.
• N 2, a braunch of the third coniugation deriued to the musculous skin of the forehead.
• O 2, a branch of the same to the vpper iaw.
• PP 2, another into the coate of the nosethrils.
• Q 2, another into the temporall muscle.
• R 2, a branch of the fourth coniugation crumpled like the tendrill of a vine.
• S 2, a branch of the same reaching vnto the vpper teeth and the gummes.
• T 2, another of the same to the lower iaw.
• V 2, a Surcle of the branch, T to the lower lip.
• XX 2, other surcles from the braunch T to the rootes of the lower Teeth.
• YY 2, the assumption of the nerue of the fourth coniu∣gation vnto the coat of the toung.
• Z 1, 2, the fourth paire vulgarly so called which are sp•••• into the coate of the pallat.
• a 1, 2, the fift paire of sinewes which belong to the hea∣ring.
• φ, the Auditory nerue spred abroade into the couity of the stony bone.
• * a hard part of the fift coniugation aboue the * which may accounted for a distinct nerue.
• b 1, 2, a small braunch deriued from this harder part of the fift payre.
• c 1, 2, a lower branch from the same originall.
• d 1, 2, this nerue is commonly ascribed to the fift payre, but indeede is a distinct coniugation which we will call the Eight, because wee would not interrupt the order of other mens accounts.
• e 1, 2; the sixt paire of sinewes. f 2, 2 branch from them deriued to the necke and the museles couched there upon, g 2, another branch to the muscles of the larynx or throttle. h 1, 2, the seauenth paire of sinewes i 1, the vnion of the seauenth paire with the sixt. l 2, a propagation of the seauenth paire to those muscles which arise from the appendix called Styloides. m 2, Surcles from the seauenth coniugation to the muscles of the toung, the bone Hyois and the Larynx. o p q 1, three holes; through the hole o the phlegme yssueth out of the third ventricle of the braine to the Tunnell, and at p q is the passage of the soporary arteries to the ventricles of the braine.

fig. 1. & 2. ^F tab. 14. fig. 19. ^DF], neare the optick nerues [tab. 17. fig, 1, 2. ^•] do passe betwixt the braine, (whereto they are tyed by the mediation of the pia mater) the wedge-bone and the bone of the forehead vnto the Sinus or cauity of the spongy bone; [tab 14. fig, 19. ^{H F}] which cauities are couered with the dura meninx diuersly perforated & are made to receiue these productions. To each of these processes saith Fa••lopius reacheth a manifest hole from the * 1.351 ventricle, from which hole the passage is open to the spongy bone. This passage in a man is very narrow, so that it cannot be discerned, but when the head is very greene or new. In Oxen it is very large. Through these passages & productions aire and vapors attracted or * 1.352 drawn in respiration through the nosthrils as it were by pipes and channels, are carried vn to the braine that it might iudge of odoriferous obiects. Varolius is of opinion that from these productions there is no free passage vnto the ventricles themselues; although Fallopi∣us was vtterly of another minde. They are like to nerues in their passage, colour and vse, * 1.353 and therfore do well deserue to be called the Nerues of smelling as Archangelus stileth them. But Vesalius counteth them to be the first paire or coniugation of the braine; yet because they neuer attaine through the thicke membrane and cauity of the skul, neither hane as o∣ther nerues any propagations deriued from them: therefore neither Herophilus nor Mari∣nus nor Galen himselfe, nor many amongst the Neotericks or new writers haue vouchsafed them the name of nerues; wee stand not vpon wordes and therefore passe from them vnto the nerues of the eies.

CHAP. XVII. Of the nerues of the Eyes, or of the first and second Coniugations.

ALbeit in a particular discourse hereafter following wee intend more dis∣trictly and carefully to prosecute the Nature and diuarications of nerues in generall and euery one in particular; yet because all the nerues of the head haue their originall from diuers partes of the substance of the same: Wee cannot chuse in this place but make some mention of them though * 1.354 it be the briefer.

The first coniugation therefore of the nerues of the braine are the Opticks, [Table 17. figure 1. and 2. ^G] larger and softer then all other simple nerues. Larger because they bee sensibly perforated, softer because they arise out of the Center of the Basis, whence procee∣ding forward with a slow course they are vnited aboue the saddle of the wedge-bone [tab. 17. figure 1. ^H table 14. figure 19. ^O] and so make a common body. After being againe se∣parated [Table 14. figure 19. ^{M N} Table 17. figure 1. aboue ^H] they passe obliquely foreward through their proper hole] table 4. figure 10. ^B] the one to the Center of the right eye, the other to the Center of the left [ta. 3. lib. 8. fig. 8. ^a or together with the membrane fig. 2. ^abc. * 1.355]

They consist of a double substance, the one marrowey the other membranous. The marrowey is soft like the substance of the braine, which you shall perceiue to yssue if it bee * 1.356 hard pressed, and of this marrowy substance dilated in the orbe of the eye is that coat made which of the similitude of a net is called Retina tunica [Tab. 17. fig. 1 and 2. I] and this com∣passeth the glassy humour like a sphere. * 1.357

It hath two membranes from the two Meninges of the braine. The thin membrane in∣uesteth it from the originall to his out-let from the skul; the thick Meninx is added to it, frō thence to the eye; and so the thicke membrane degenerateth into the horny coate, the thin is consumed or spent in the Vuea, and so the Animall spirit is transported through the con∣tinuation of this nerue vnto the pupilla or Apple, which is the hole of the grapie mēbrane.

They are called therefore Opticke nerues from their action, because they communi∣cate to the eye the sence of seeing.

The second coniugation is of the nerues which moue the eyes, [table 18. figure 1. and 2. * 1.358 ^• tab. 15. figure 20. ^G] which is distinguished from the former only by a little and thin bone, and riseth from the Basis of the braine [tab. 25. fig. 1. ^C] a little behinde the former as Vesali∣us saith. This is smaller and slenderer by much then is the opticke, as also harder because it was to be inserted into the muscles. It yssueth by a proper hole of his owne [tab. 4. fig. 10. ^G] which is the second of the wedge-bone, where after it is diuided into notable braunches which are sent into the muscles. In some bodies (though it be but seldom) they send small * 1.359 twigs to the temporall muscles; whence it is that sometimes if that muscle be offended the eie also suffereth with it, and so on the contrary.

Their vse is to afford to the muscles the facultie of Motion, as also a drawing power to their membranes. Now the reason why when one eie is mooued to the side the other also * 1.360 necessarily followeth, is, because these nerues are continued one with another in their ori∣ginall.

CHAP. XVIII. Of the third and fourth coniugations of the Nerues of the Braine.

THE third coniugation [Tab. 19, fig. 1 and 2 ^I. Ta. 15, fig. 20 ^H] is sent vnto the Muscles of the face & is commonly called the smaller roote of the third * 1.361 paire, but it deserueth, we think, to be a particular coniugation, because it is not ioyned with the following paire [Tab. 15. fig. 20 ^I. Tab 19. fig. 1 and 2. ^L with ^M] neyther in his beginning nor in his progresse.

It ariseth from the lower and backer part of the marrow of the Braine. It is very smal * 1.362 and perforateth the dura Meninx at the side of the basis of the Braine where it is fastned to the second coniugation [Tab. 19, fig. 1. ^A] and so with it yssueth into the orbe of the * 1.363 eye by a hole common to them both. [Tab. 3. fig. 8, ^G] Then it is diuided into four bran∣ches: the first [Tab. 19. fig. 2 ^N] ascendeth vpwarde by the fat of the eye and yssueth at a hole of the forehead bone proper vnto it [Tab. 3. fig. 8 ^A] and so passeth into the skinne of the Forehead to which it giueth motion, as also to the vpper eye-brow.

The second descendeth [Tab. 19. fig. 2. O] and passeth through a hole of his owne, bored in the fourth bone of the vpper Iaw [Table. 3. fig. 8. ^B] and so is dispersed into the Muscles of the vpper lip, into those that mooue the wing of the Nose outward, into the tip itselfe and some of the gummes.

The third branch [Tabl. 19. fig. 2. ^P] passeth thorough the second hole of the vpper iaw [Tab. 3. fig. 8 C] and attaineth into the Cauity of the Nosethrilles and is spent into their coate, [Tab. 19. figu. 2. the lower P] and affoordeth a small sur∣cle to the membranous Muscle vvhich contracteth the wing of the nose.

The fourth branch [Table. 19. fig. 2. ^Q] being led thorough the Fissure which is betwixt the bone of the vpper iawe and the Wedge-bone [Tab. 3. fig. 8 ^D] is spent into the inner part of the temporall mus∣cles.

The Fourth Coniugation are the * 1.364 Nerues of Tasting, [Tab. 19. fig. 1. and 2. ^M. Tab. 15. fig. 20. l] it beareth on the for∣mer in his progresse but not in his origi∣nall. It proceedeth not out of the backe * 1.365 parts of the brain because they are hard; not out of the sides because their waye would not haue been safe; but out of the basis yea the very Marrow of the Braine [Tab. 25. fig. 1. Char. 3] aswell for security as because of the Situation of the toong.

It yssueth at the sixt hole of the wedg-bone * 1.366 [Tab. 3. fig. 9. ^Q] and presently send∣eth a Surcle out of it like the crumpled Tendrill of a Vine, in which the Animall spirit maketh some stay. Afterwards, it is * 1.367 by two branches vnited to the Nerue of Hearing, [Table. 19. fig. 1, 2. ^{b c}] and so is disseminated into the muscles of the face the Temporall, the grinding Muscles of the Cheekes and to the Skinne of the face.

A second branch it also parteth with [Tab. 19. fig: 2 S] which affoordeth surcles to that part of the Gummes wherein the grinding Teeth are fastened, yea vnto the teeth them∣selues.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XIX.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II.

A third branch also sprowteth out of his back-part, [Table 19, fig. 2. ^T] which is inserted into the muscle that lurketh within the mouth, and passeth through the inner hole [tab. 11. lib. 8. fig. 2. ^F] of the lower Iaw, and there offereth surcles to the Rootes of the lower teeth * 1.368 on the same side, [Tab. 19, fig. 2. ^xx] and by their helpe the teeth haue sense, whereas the o∣ther bones haue none.

Finally, the Trunke it selfe [Table 19, fig. 2. ^Y] passing through the muscles lurking in the mouth together with the Trunke of the other side attaine to the side of the tongue and is consumed into his coate to make it a conuenient Organ of Gustation.

CHAP. XIX. Of the Nerue of hearing, or of the fift Coniugation of the Braine.

THE fift Coniugation [Tab. 20, fig. 1, and 2, ^a Tab. 15, fig. 20. ^M] ariseth out of * 1.369 the Marrow of the Braine lengthened, where it ioyneth with the Cerebellum. [Table 25, figure 1, ⁱ] There his originall seemeth to be out of two Surcles or Nerues, the one softer the other harder, which together perforate the mem∣brane * 1.370 and passe to the stony bone.

This Nerue passeth through a notable writhen hole thrilled in the stony-bone, which * 1.371 they call the fift hole of the Temple bone, where it meeteth with that cauity which is com∣pared to a Conniborough and prepared for the Organ of hearing. Afterward the har∣der part falleth into the cauity called Tympanum or the Drum.

The softer part [Table 20, fig. 2, ^a] which is indeed Neruus auditorus the sinew of hea∣ring, * 1.372 accompanieth the former, and when it attaineth to the extremity of the aboue named cauity it is dilated like a membrane [Table 20, fig. 1, 2. Φ] and becommeth the speciall In∣strument of hearing, and in that place remaineth haply after the same manner that wee saide before the Organ of Smelling was extended.

CHAP. XX. Of the sixt, seauenth, and eight Coniugations of the Sinewes.

THE sixt Coniugation [Tab. 21, fig. 1, and 2, ^e Tab. 15, fig. 20. ^N] taketh his be∣ginning of a few fibres a little below the originall of the Nerue of hearing. These Nerues being instantly vnited doe make one notable Nerue as some haue thought, but indeed they are neuer so vnited but that they remaine two * 1.373 Nerues contained or held together in one membrane, and passe out at one hole, [Tab. 4, fig. 10. ^b] which is counted the 2. hole of the occipitium or Nowle-bone. The one of those is the forwarder & the lesser: the other the backwarder & the greter. The lesser runneth directly to the muscles of the tongue, and for the most part is spent in the mouth; * 1.374 the greater as soone as it is issued out of the Scul sendeth a branch backward [Tab. 21, fig. 2, ^f] which is diuersly distributed into the Mūcks-hood muscle of the shoulder blade. The trūk it selfe descending is tyed to the seauenth Coniugation, [Tab. 21, fig. 2. ^H] and at the sides of the throtle is increased with a branch from that seauenth Coniugation, [Table. 21, fig. 2, ⁱ] * 1.375 with which notwithstanding it is not mingled but onely colligated or tyed: after it sendeth surcles to the muscles of the Layrinx or throtle, [Tab. 21, fig. 2. ^g] as also some other smaller to the muscles of the Chops, thence it descendeth to the Chest, where we will leaue it til another time.

The seauenth Coniugation [Ta. 21, fig. 1, ^h fig. 2, ^H] moues the tongue, and is the hardest * 1.376 of all the sinewes proceeding out of the Scull; for it ariseth iust at the place where the mar∣row of the braine falleth out of the Scul. [Tab. 21, fig. 1, 2, ^E] It ariseth of many Roots some∣what * 1.377 distant each from other, which ioyning together into one do passe out of the Scull at an oblique hole bored in the bone of the Occipitium, and for more security is ioyned by strong membranes with the sixt Coniugation, yet not mingled therewith. For this seauenth paire keepeth his owne body and so runneth downward to the roote of the tongue, where * 1.378 the most part of it [Ta. 21, fig. 2, ^Z] is loosened into many fibres which giue motion therto. Other parts of it are deriued to the muscles of the bone Hyois and the Throtle to giue them motion; some surcles also it sendeth [Ta. 21, fig 2, ^l] to those muscles that arise from the ap∣pendix called Stylo-ides.

The eight Coniugation [Tab. 21, fig. 1, 2, ^d Table. 15, fig. 20, ^L] proceedeth out of the * 1.379 marrow of the braine aboue the Auditory Nerue betwixt the second and the third Coniu∣gations.

It perforateth betwixt those 2. paires the thicke Meninx and attayneth into the orbe of the eye through the hole that belongeth to the second coniugation, and is almost wholly spent into that muscle of the eye which draweth it vnto the vtter corner.

CHAP. XXI. Of the Nerues proceeding from the spinal marrow properly so called.

HAuing acquainted you with those coniugations of sinewes which belong vn∣to any part of the brain or his productions contained within the Skull, it re∣mayneth nowe to giue you a short viewe of those nerues which are deriued out of the spinall marrow contayned in the rack-bones of the Chine. These therefore are accounted to be 30. paire, all proceeding out of distinct and se∣ueral parts; that is to say out of the racks of the neck, the chest, the loines & the holy-bone.

The Coniugations of the Neck some account seauen, others eight, dispersed into the * 1.380 outside of the whole head and the muscles thereof.

The first Coniugation yssueth betweene the Occipitium or Nowle bone & the first rack-bone, and is diuided into two little branches, a forward and lesser, [Tab. 22,^H] and a back∣ward. [Tab. 23,^F]

The second Coniugation of the Necke hath two originals, a forward [Tab. 22,^N] and a backward which is the larger, [Table 23,^I] which is diuided into two branches, a thicker [Tab. 23,^K] and a thinner. [Tab. 23, aboue^H]

The 3. paire [Ta. 22, charracter³] breaketh out of the common hole betweene the second and the third spondels or rackes and is diuided into two branches, one forward [Tab. 22^P] which is subdiuided into foure Surcles. The first at Tab. 22,^Q.] The second at Ta. 22, and 23,^R.] The third at Tabble 22,^S and Table 23,^KL. The fourth at Tab. 22, and 23,^T.] Ano∣ther backward, [Tab. 22, and 23,^O] disseminated into the muscles which are common to the head and the necke.

The fourth Coniugation [Tab. 21, Char.⁴] falleth out of the common hole of the third and fourth vertebrae, and is diuided into two branches, the first forward and greater, [Tab. 22, and 23,^x] which is diuided into three Surcles, the first at [tab. 22,^y.] the second at [tab. 22,^a.] the third at tab. 22,^b.] The second branch is the lesser and more backward, [tab. 22, and 23,^v] and is spent in the muscles of the Necke and the membranous muscles of the Cheekes.

The fift Coniugation [tab. 22, char.⁵] falleth out vnder the fourth rack-bone, and is diui∣ded into two branches, one forward and another backward; the forward [tab. 22, & 23,^•] hath three Surcles, the first at tab. 22,^{a d}] the second [tab. 22,^e] the third [table 22, & 23,^f] The backward branch [tab. 23,^c] is distributed as is the backward branch of the fourth paire.

The sixt Coniugation [table 22, char.⁶] falleth out vnder the first racke, and is likewise diuided into a fore and a hinder branch: the fore branch at [table 22,^l] the hinder branch at [table 23,^k.]

The seauenth Coniugation [table 22, char.⁷] yssueth vnder the sixt racke bone of the Necke, and is ioyned with the sixt paire of the Necke and the first of the Chest [tab. 22,^s.] for more security; and the greatest part of it passeth into the arme, which sometime sen∣deth a branch to accomplish the Nerue of the Midriffe. The backer branch [table 23,^t] is the lesse, and is bestowed vpon the muscles lying vpon the necke and vpon the square mus∣cle of the Cheeke, which first suffereth convulsion in the disease called Spasmus Cynicus, or the Dog laughter.

And thus much of the Nerues proceeding from the spinall marrow contained within the vertebrae or spondels of the necke, which we sayde were seauen Coniugaions. It fol∣loweth now that we should intreate of the nerues proceeding from the marrow of the rack bones of the Thorax or Chest. Of these there are as some thinke but eleauen Coniuga∣tions others resolue of twelue, all which after their outlet are diuided into two branches, * 1.381 one greater, the other lesser; one passing forward, another reflected backward.

The first Coniugation [table 22, char.⁸] is snewed betwixt the seauenth bone of the Neck and the first of the Chest. It hath two branches, the first greater sendeth certaine pro∣pagations to the shoulder blade [table 23, ^αα] to the first rib. [table 22,^y] The second lesser [table 23,^u] is disseminated into the adioyning muscles.

The second Coniugation [table 23, char.⁹] yssueth betwixt the first and second bone of the Chest; then it distributeth a branch backward, [table 23,^β] and after is ioyned with a

branch of the former Coniugation, [tab. 23, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉] & so passeth into the arme; that which re∣maineth of this Coniugation followeth the course of the first ribbe, and maketh an inter∣costall Nerue.

The 3. Coniugation as also all the other nine [table 22, from char.¹⁰, to ²⁰] of the Chest are distributed after the same manner. For after they fall out of the sides of the vertebrae they * 1.382 are diuided into two branches, one forward and another backward; the forward branches are called Intercostales, that is, betwixt the ribs, [table 22, ^☐] for from them many bran∣ches are disseminated into the Intercostall muscles, [table 22, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and the charracters of the left side] into the muscles lying vpon the Chest, [table 22, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉] as the great and lesser Saw, the pectorall and the broad Muscle; [table 22, ^μμ] and are strangely reflected to the vessels thereabout. The backward branches leane backward to the spines or sharpe points of the vertebrae, and are deriued into the muscles which moue the backe of the Chest, and into the skinne of the backe; but their distribution is not in all men alike.

Finally, the two last coniugations of the twelue do send Surcles [tab. 22. at the sides of the 18. and 19. Characters] to the head of the sixt muscle of the thigh.

From the spinall marrow contained in the racks of the loynes doe arise fiue coniugati∣ons * 1.383 greater then the former, deuided likewise after their out-gate into a forward & a back∣ward branch, and from their backward branches [table 23, char.⁵² and ⁵³] send surcles into the muscles which grow to the vertebrae of the Loynes.

The first Coniugation [table 22, char.²⁰] as also all the rest yssue out of the holes of the vertebrae vnder the Peritonaeum, and is diuided into two branches, a greater and anterior partly ascending to the Diaphragma, partly to the muscles of the Abdomen or paunch; and a lesser and posterior which is reflected into the muscles which leape vpon the vertebrae of the Loynes.

The second Coniugation [table 22, char.²¹] runneth vnder the sixt muscle of the thighe and riseth to the top of the haunch bone, but the forward branch is distributed to the sixth internall Iliack, and the first bender of the legge. It sendeth also a small long nerue [table 22, char.⁴⁹] accompaning the spermaticall vessels of the same side euen vnto the Testicle.

The third coniugation [Table 22. Char.²²] yssueth also vnder the Lumball muscle; the fore-branch passeth neare the haunch-bone & is deuided into two propagations, one going to the knee the other accompanying the veine called Saphena; but the back braunch is reflected and disseminated into the muscles, lying vpon the loynes and into the skin. So likewise from all the fore-branches of the three first coniugations certaine shootes [Table 22. the sides of the 20. 21. 22. Characters] do attaine to the costall nerue, and are ioyned therewith.

The fourth coniugation [Table 22. Char. 23.] which is the biggest of all the coniuga∣tions of he loynes accompanieth the veine and arterie to the groine, and distributeth cer∣t•••••• surcles to the forward muscles of the thigh and the leg.

The fift coniugation [table 22. Char. 24.] is parted in twaine as are the former. The fore-branch and the greater passeth through a hole betwixt the Coxa, the share-bone and the hanch-bone and sendeth diuers shootes to the muscles of the thigh, the yarde, the neck of the wombe also and the bladder; but the backe-braunch is reflected to the muscles, they leane vpon the vertebrae of the loynes and into the skin there abouts. Furthermore, these coniugations are tyed one vnto another, the first to the second, the second to the third, the third with the fourth, and the fourth with the fift, as is shewed in the first figure of the 22. Table.

To conclude, out of the marrow conteyned in the vertebrae of the Os sacrū or holy-bone do proceed sixe coniugations. * 1.384

The first [Table 22. char. 25.] yssueth betwixt the last of the loyne and the first racke of the holy bone, and is deuided into a fore-branch and a hind-branch; the fore-branch sen∣deth a surcle [table 22. charact. ••3] into the inside of the hanch-bone, from which certaine shoots are offered to the muscles of the Abdomen, and the seuenth muscle of the thigh. The back-braunch passeth in a like course as doe the backe branches of the other coniugations & a shoot beside into the muscles [table 23. charact. 54.] produced from the haunch-bone, specially into the first mouing the thigh, from whence it is consumed into the skin.

The fiue other coniugations [table 22. from the 26. to the 30. chara.] are produced after * 1.385 mother manner; for before they yssue they are double on either side; one proceeding for∣ward and another backward. Or the fore-branches the three vppermost runne to the leg,

[illustration]

Table 22. and Table 23. Because the same Characters belong to them both, we haue set them together.

[illustration]

Table 22. sheweth the Racks of the spine and the nerues yssuing there from on the foreside.

[illustration]

Table 23. sheweth the same Racks and Nerues on the backside.

[illustration]

TABVLA XXII. & XXIII.

A 1, 2, The spinast marrow as it goeth into the rack-bones. BC 2, The seauen vertebrae or racke bones of the neck. Character from 1, 2, to 30. in the 15. table do shew the racks of the whole spine. CD 2, amongst these the twelue racks of the Chest. DE 2, The fiue Racks of the Loynes. E 2. The holy bone. F 2, the hinder braunch of the first coniugation of sinewes. G 1, 2, the distribution of the same branch into the muscles of the head. H 1, the forward branch of the first coniugation. I 2, a small branch of the hinder propagation of the second paire which is distributed vpward. K, a thicker braunch of the same nerue. L 2, the coition or coniunction of a branch of the third paire, with the branch of the second paire marked with K. MM 1, 2, the second paire distributed vnto the skin of the head as far as to the neeke. N 1, the anterior branch of the second paire. Character 3 in the first Ta∣ble sheweth the third coniugation and the third rack-bone. O 1, 2, the hinder branch of the third paire reflected first backeward, then forward vnto the muscles: & such a reflection there is in all the nerues vnto char. 24. P 1, the anterior braunch of the third paire parted into foure. Q 1, the first going vnto the muscles. R 1, 2, the see and ioyning with the fourth paire. S 1, the third commixed with the branch K. T 1, 2. the fourth branch going to the muscles of that place. Character 4, in 1, the fourth coniugation of the fourth rackbone. V 1, 2, the posterior branch of the 4. paire. X 1, 2, the anterior braunch of the 4. paire parted into three. Y 1, the first admitting the branch R. a 1, the 2 going to the muscles. b 1, the 3 reaching to a part of the fift payre marked with e. Char. 5 in •••• the 5 paire. c 2, the posterior branch of the 5. payre. d 1, 2, the anterior brāch of the 5. paire. e 1, this portiō maketh the nerue of the midriffe. f 1, 2, a braunch of the nerue d creeping along the top of the shoulder, vnder which are cer∣tain surcles attaining to the shoulder blade. g 1, 2, a surcle of the nerue f deriued to the skin on the top of the shoul∣der. h 1, 2, a surcle of the nerue f going to the second muscle of the arme. i 1, 2, another branch inserted in∣to the same muscle and the skin. Char, 6, in 1, the sixt paire. k 2, the posterior braunch of the same sixt coniugati∣on. l 1, the anterior braunch of the same coniugation. m 1, a surcle of the same nerue appointed to make vp the

Sinew of the midriffe. n 1, 2, the nerue of the midriffe made of three surcles, b, b, and m. o o 1, 2, the inserti∣on of this nerue into the midriffe. p 2, A branch of the sixt coniugation running to the cauity of the shoulder blade. q 1, 2, the coniunction or implication of the branch l with the branches neighbouring about it. Char 7 in 1, the seauenth coniugation of sinewes. r 2, the posterior branch of the seauenth paire. s 1, the congresse or meeting of the seauenth coniugation with the branches that are neere it. t t 2, Surcles of this nerue deriued to the muscles of the shoulder blade and the arme. char 8. in 1, the eight coniugation or the first paire of the Chest running aboue the first rack-bone of the Chest. u 2, the posterior branch of the eight paire. x 1, 2, the co∣ition or coniunction of the 8. paire with the 7. y 1, A brāch of the eight paire reaching to the top of the brest. αα 2, Surcles proceeding from the eight coniugation and deriued to the muscles in this place. char 9 in 1, the ninth paire of nerues. β 2, the posterior branch of the ninth paire. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, the anterior branch of the same coniugati∣on. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, 1 Surcles from this branch to the distances or spaces of the Chest. Chara. 10, to 20, in 1, the paires of si∣newes deriued to the distances betwixt the ribs. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, Surcles of the intercostall sinewes going to the roots of the ribs and increasing the costall nerues. θ θ θ 1, Branches from the intercostall sinewes deriued vnto the muscles which lye vpon the Chest. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, 1 Branches going to the pectorall muscle or the first muscle of the arme. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, Other branches going to the lower side of the same muscle. λ λ 1, Branches going to the oblique mus∣cles of the Abdomen. μ μ 1, Others deriued to that muscle of the arme which is called Latissimus. v 1, A brāch passing vnto the Pap. o o 1, Branches from 18, & 19, to the beginning of that muscle of the thigh which is cal∣led Lumbalis or the sixt muscle of the Thigh. π π 1, the first nerue of the arme distributed into the skin. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, 2, the second nerue of the arme. σ σ, 1, From this doe nerues passe to the first muscle of the cubite called Biceps. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, 2, The third nerue of the arme. •• 1, 2, A branch of the same going to the skin of the arme. φ 1, A small branch deriued to the second muscle of the cubite called Brachiaeus. χ 1, Others passing to the skin on the foreside of the arme. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, the congresse or coniunction of the third nerue with the second. ω 1, the second & the third nerues after their coniunction doe heere creepe downeward. T 1, A Nerue deriued vnto the second muscle of the Radius which muscle is called Supinator longior, ΔΔ 1, the vpper branch of the second nerue, running to the wrest and to the first ioynt of the thumbe. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 1, the middle branch of the second nerue, Λ 1, the progresse of the same euen vnto the hand. ξ 1, the lower branch of the second nerue. π σ 1, Two branches of the same nerue going to the inside of the hand. Φ 1, 2, the fourth nerue of the arme. γ 2, From hence do pro∣ceede nerues to the muscles which extend or stretch out the cubite. Ω 2, A branch going to the skin of the arme on the backside. 32, 2 Branches deriued to the outward skin of the arme. 34, 2, the by-partition of the fourth nerue at the cubite. 33, 2, A branch creeping along the outside of the cubite euen vnto the wrest. 35, 2, The vpper branch of the foresaide diuision. 36, 2, Surcles belonging to the thumbe, the forefinger and the middle finger on their outsides. 37, 2, the lower branch of the foresaide diuision. 38, 2, Surcles heerefrom to the muscles arising out of the externall bunch of the shoulder bone. 39, 40, 41, 2, Three branches going to the muscles which spring from the bone called Ulna. 42, 2, The end of the branch, 37, neere the ioynt of the wrest. * 1, 2, The fift nerue of the arme. 43, 1, Surcles of the third and fift nerues to the inside of the cubite, 44 1, A branch of the third nerue going to the palme of the hand and the fingers. 45, 1, A branch of the 5, nerue to the inside of the hand. 46, 1, A Surcle of the branch 45, led to the outside of the hand. 8, 1, 2, the sixt nerue of the arme. 47, 1. the end thereof next the ioynt. 48, 48, 1, Surcles from the sixt nerue vnto the skin. Char. 20, to 24, 1, Nerues proceeding out of the racks of the loynes. 49, 49, 1, A branch going into the Testicles from the 20 paire. 50, 50, 1, The nerues belonging to the muscles of the Abdomen. 51, 1, Surcles from these to the broad muscle of the arme called Latissimus. 52, 52, 2, The backward branches proceeding out of the racks of the Loynes. Char 25, to 30, The coniugations or paires of sinewes proceeding out of the holy-bone. 53, 1, A branch of the 25 paire going to the inside of the coxendix or hip-bone. 54, 55, 2, A branch attaining to the outside of the coxendix. * 2, Hence proceedeth a nerue communicated to the yard. 56, 2, the end of the spinal marrow. 57, 1, The first nerue of the Leg. 58, 1, Brāches here from to the skin. 59, 1, Other brāches herefrom to the muscles. 60, 1, The 2. nerue of the Leg. 61, 61, 1 Brāches herefrom to the skin. 62, 1, A brāch descēding to the top of the foot. 63, 1. Branches from 61, compassing the knee. 64, 1, A branch of the 2. nerue going to the muscles. 65, 1 A brāch here-from going to the fift muscle of the thigh cald Triceps 66. 1, the nerue of the Leg. 67, 1, A surcle creeping to the hole of the share-bone. 68, 1 A branch allowed to the skin on the inside of the thigh, 69, 1. A portion of the third nerue going to the muscles. 70, 1, A portiō hereof communicated to the 2. muscle which bendeth the leg or Tibia, 71, 1, 2, The fourth nerue of the leg 72, 1, 2, A branch heereof co∣municated to the skin of the thigh in the backpart. 73. 1, Another to the muscles which arise from the Co∣xendix. 74, 1, A branch allowed to the fourth muscle of the Tibia or leg and to the skin. 75, 1, Surcles from the fourth to the heads of the muscles of the foote. 76, 1, The diuision of the fourth nerue in the Ham into two Trunkes. 77, 1, the outward trunke. 78, 78, 1, A branch heere from to the skin of the leg or Tibia on the out∣side as farre as to the little toe. 79, 1, Another branch inserted into the muscles. 80, 1, A branch dispersed into the skin of the foreside of the leg from the branch. 79 81, 1, A part of the branch. 79, going to the mucles of the foote. 82, 1, the inner trunke of the fourth Nerue. 83, 83, 1. A branch creeping along the inside of the legge vnder the skin. 84, 1. A branch of the Trunke, 82, disposed vnder the skin to the back side of the Calse of the legge 85. 85. 1, A branch of the trunke, 82, creeping along the foreside of the legge to the vp∣per part of the foote. 86, 1, A branch of the trunke 82, passing along the backside of the legge and distribu∣ted to the muscles. 87, 1, The remainder of the inner trunke allowed to the Toes. the two lowermost are diuersly distributed into the muscles of the Fundament & the Blad∣der and parts thereabouts. But the back-branches [table 23. char. 54. and 55] are distribu∣ted into the muscles on the backside of the hanch and holy bones, and into the skin of the ••uttocks.

[illustration]

Table 24. sheweth the Braine together with the After-braine, the spinall marrowe and the nerues of the whole body.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XXIIII.

• A, that part of the brain that is next the nosethrils.
• B, that part which is at the side of the ventricles.
• C, the backpart of the braine.
• D, the Cerebellum or After-braine.
• E, the Mamillary processe on the right side.
• F, the originall of the opticke nerue.
• G, their coniunctions.
• H, The coate into which the optick nerue is extended.
• I, the second paire of the sinewes of the braine.
• K, the lesser roote of the third coniugation.
• L, the thick roote of the same coniugation according to the common opinion.
• M, the fourth coniugation of sinewes.
• N, the lesser roote of the fift paire.
• O, the bigger roote of the same paire.
• P, The small membrane of the eare which they call the Tympanie.
• Q the lower branch of the bigger roote of the fift con∣iugation.
• S, the sixt paire of sinewes.
• T, the seauenth paire.
• V, the beginning of the spinall marrow out of the mid∣dle of the Basis of the braine.
• X, the right sinewe of the midriffe cut off.
• Y, a branch from the fift paire creeping to the top of the shoulder.
• Z, the first nerue of the arme from whence there goeth a branch to the skin.
• A, the second nerue of the arme, and a branch therefrom into the first muscle of the Cubite.
• B, the third nerue of the arme and a branch going to the skin on the outside.
• C, a branch from the third nerue to the second muscle of the Cubite.
• D, the congresse or meeting of the second nerue with the third.
• E, a small branch from the third nerue to the second mus∣cle of the Radius.
• F, the distribution of the second nerue into two branches
• * The lesser branch of this diuision lengthened out to the skin as far as the thumbe.
• a, the place of the spinall marrow where it yssueth out of the braine.

1, 2, 3, &c. Thirty paire of nerues arising from the spinall marrow are here noted by their Characters, that is to say, seauen of the necke, twelue of the Chest, fiue of the loynes, and sixe of the holy bone.

b, the thicker branch of the second nerue deuided into two parts. c, Braunches of the third nerue sprinkled here and there. d, Nerues from the third paire to the thumb, the forefinger and the middle finger. ee, the 4. nerue of the arme. f, the passage hereof through the inside of the shoulder. g, a tripartition of this braunch where it toucheth the Cubite. h h, a branch distributed from the fourth nerue to the outward skinne of the Cubite. i, the vpper branch of the deuision of the fourth nerue, kk a branch of i reaching to the outside of the hand. l l, the lower branch of the diuision of the 4. nerue passing through the backeside of the Cubite. m, the fift nerue of the arem. n, branches of this nerue dispersed here and there. o o, a branch of the 5. nerue reaching to the inside of the hand and the fingers. p, a surcle of the braunch o deriued to the outside of the hand and the fingers. qq, the 6. nerue of the arme and the course thereof vnder the skin. rr, the Intercostall nerues, there cut off where they are together with the ribs reflected forward. s s, branches on each side run∣ning backward. t t, nerues attaining vnto the chest. uu, the commixtion of the nerues rr with the descending branch of the sixt coniugation of the braine. xx, nerues from the loynes led vnto this place. y, a branch go∣ing to the testicle here cut off. z, a nerue reaching to the first muscle of the thigh. e, the first nerue of the leg. αβ, a surcle of the former nerue deriued to the skin at α and inserted into the muscles at β. γ, the 2. nerue of the leg. ♌♌♌, a nerue from the former, allowed vnto the skin as low as to the foot, & passing along the in∣side of the leg. ε, a branch of the 2. nerue running vnto the muscles. ζ, the third nerue of the leg. ε, a surcle thereof vnto the skin. θ, another surcle vnto the muscles. ••••, the 4. nerue of the leg. χχ, the anterior propaga∣tions of the nerues proceeding from the holy-bone. Λ, the end of the spinall marrow, μ, a branch from the 4. nerue inserted into the muscles arising from the Coxendix or hip bone. ψ, another branch going to the skin of the thigh on the backside. ξ, a propagation deriued to the 4. muscle of the leg & to the skin of the knee. oo, nerues attaining to the heads of the muscles of the foote. πη, the deuision of the 4. crurall nerue into two trunks. σ, a branch from the trunk π dispersed into the outward skin of the leg. τ, a surcle of the trunk •• de∣riued to the muscles. ••, another surcle to the skin of the leg on the foreside. φφ, a branch of the trunk p to the skin of the inside of the leg & of the foot. γ, a surcle of the trūk p to the hindmost skin of the leg. 4, a brāch of the whole trunk p led along to the forward part of the leg & the foot. ω, the defect of the trūk p into the foot.

Finally, the end of the spinall marrow [table 22. and 23. char. 56.] proceeding from the holy-bone sendeth one propagation on either side, which is sometimes diuersly diuarica∣ted and disseminated into the fourth muscle of the thigh, and the skinne betwixt the but∣tocks and the fundament. Notwithstanding in Dogs and Apes there are three coniuga∣tions proceeding out of the Coccyx or rump-bone.

Wherefore to summe vp all, we must remember that the spinall marrow hath 30. paire * 1.386 or coniugations of sinewes; seauen belonging to the marrow of the necke, twelue to the marrow of the backe, fiue to the marrow of the loynes and sixe to the marrow of the holy-bone: all which it is very necessary a Physition and Surgion should know, that hee may be able to apply Oyntments, Cataplasmes and such like to the proper parts of the spine, when the nowle of the head, the face, the necke, the hands, the parts of the Chest, the muscles of the Abdomen, the wombe, the bladder, the fundament, the yard or the legges are depriued of Sence or Motion or both together.

CHAP. XXII. Varolius his manner of dissecting the Head.

THere is in the body of man so great variety of all manner of parts, that it is impossible to follow the trace of Nature by humane diligence so neerly that a man shall not sometimes wander out of his way or be at losse. It is there∣fore no wonder if the ancient and first Anatomists (men questionlesse very oculate and sharp sighted) did not yet attaine to the exquisite knowledge of all particulars, but left many thinges to bee found out and perfected by their Successours. Nay we assure our selues that no processe of time, diligence of inquisition or helps of o∣ther mens labours shall euer be able to bring Anatomy to such perfection, but that there will be place left for them that come after to finde out something neuer before discouered; so like is this little world of mans body to the great globe of the Vniuerse, wherein euery day new Countries and Nations, yea populous and rich states and Common-wealthes are by Trauellers found out. An instance hereof in the Art we haue in hand is Constantinus, Varolius, who in the yeare 1570. inuented a new manner of dissection of the braine, which * 1.387 how it is accōplished as we haue partly learned by his Epistles written An. 1573. partly by our own dissections saith Bauhine, for these 24. yeares together we will here relate, because it doth better exhibite the true originall of the spinall marrow and the nerues proceeding there from, as also the structure of the ventricles for our better satisfaction in the causes of the deseases of the head and the explayning of some passages in Hippocrates and Galen.

The difference betwixt these two Administrations is; that in the former, the vpper parts of the skull and the Meninges of the braine being remoued, the contayned parts are layde * 1.388 open to the view. But in this which is full of labour and difficulty, the bones of the head are on euery side remoued; and the parts contained within the skull yet couered with both the membranes hauing the eyes, the coniugations of the sinewes and the spinall marrow ioyned thereto; are at one view represented and the section begun at the Basis of the brain. But for this Administration the head must be greene and not waterish, otherwise we shall loose our labour: you must therefore take the head of a man newly cutte off, or for want thereof a Calues head will serue the turne, because all the particulars may bee therein dis∣cerned.

Of the Spinall Marrow.

First of all wee must begin at the Spinall Marrow which they say ariseth from the lower Basis of the braine at the great hole of the occipitium or nowle bone. [table 25. fig. 1. from ^D * 1.389 to ^•]. This is established within the skul in his proper seat and is compassed or inuested with the membranes: wherefore after the thicke Meninx is remoued, the other called pia mater is also to be taken away, which is transparant and strong, & by whose mediation the fore∣part of the marrow is tyed to the braine and the hind part to the After-brain. It also de∣tayneth or establisheth the spinall marrow that it be not reflected backward, which haply is the cause why Anatomists haue not knowne his true originall; for if you take it vp with a hooke and lightly remooue it with a knife from the partes vnder it, and bend the spinall marrow somewhat forward [Table 25. figure 2. ^{a b}] then will his originall shew it selfe to be not in the occipitium or where it was first tyed to that thin membrane, but ascending some-somewhat vpward and in the forepart of the braine.

This Marrow therefore consisteth of foure roots, whereof the two greater [Tab. 25, * 1.390 fig. 2, ^{b c} sheweth the trunke reflected, Char. 4. and 1. shew the trunke in his owne seate]

do yssue out of two parts of the Braine in that place wherein the Ventricles are reflected [Tab. 25. fig. 2.^{f g}] from the forward prominence or swelling of the brain vnto the mid∣dle, & whereabout the Opticke Nerue [Tab. 25. fig. 2.^{c d}] passeth without the ventricle.

The other two Roots are two short trunkes of the Cerebellum [Tab. 25. fig. 2. cha. 6] * 1.391 arising on either side out of the vpper part thereof, which are ioyned to the two greater productions of the Braine euen now spoken of, [Tab. 25. fig. 2. betwixt the two charac∣ters 2 and 3] and so of foure are made two, [Tab. 25. fig. 1,^•] which afterward do accom∣plish the spinall Marrow, from which all the Nerues of the whole body haue their origi∣nall as diligent inspection doth sufficiently prooue.

And the same Galen affirmeth in the 13. chap. of his 8. Booke de vsu partium and in many other places where he saith, That all the Nerues which are attributed to the spinal * 1.392 Marrow do arise from the After-braine, so that according to his Anatomy the spinall Marrow is ioyned to the Cerebellum.

Some there are and Columbus among the rest, who heerein taxe Galen, affirming that no Nerue proceedeth from the Cerebellum. But, saith Varolius, Galens opinion may be af∣ter some sort maintained to be true; but those that find fault with him affirme that which * 1.393 is absolutely false, because the spinall marrow ariseth out of two roots of the brain whēce two paire of sinnewes are produced, and out of two roots of the After-braine which are ioyned to the former and do together fulfill or accomplish the spinall Marrow; and so all the Nerues of the spinall Marrow do arise out of the Cerebellum. * 1.394

And verily that this should bee thus, it was profitable yea necessary; for the principles or originals of all things had neede to bee firme and stable. Now by how much any thing is more single and simple, by so much without doubt it is more solid and firme; wherefore it behooued that the originall of all the sinnewes should be but one simple and single originall. For if all the Arteries and Veines be redu∣ced to one originall, the Arteries to the Heart, the Veines to the Liuer; it is agreeable to the wisedome of Nature that the Nerues also should proceede from one originall; be¦cause these are three common Organs or Instruments of the body through which the A∣nimall, Vitall and Naturall Faculties are by the helpe of spirites transported together with the vitall & naturall blood. And this both Hippocrates & Plato seeme to haue known. Hippocrates who in the beginning of his Booke De Natura Ossium writeth, that the Ori∣ginall * 1.395 of Sinnewes is from the Occipitium which is the seate of the After-brain. And Pla∣to in Timaeo speaking of all the Sinnewes writeth, that God disposed the Nerues about the lower part of the Head, and compassed them with a spinal Marrow, which is of a sub∣stance like vnto theirs.

Now the originall of the spinall marrow was to bee out of the middle part of the * 1.396 Braine, [Tab. 25. fig. 2.^{b c}, and character 4. do manifestly shew it] because through it as it were through a common water-course the spirits which are perfected in the middest of the Braine were to be deriued into other Riuerets and so into the whole body. Where∣fore their beginning was to bee placed in the center of the Braine neere the Store-house or shop of the spirits, whence they might receiue them as it were with a ful streame; like as Anatomy teacheth vs, that the Arteries and the Veines do arise out of the middle of the Heart and the Liuer.

It will be obiected, that this Trunke which heere we call the Spinal marrow ought not to haue that denomination till it haue attained into the Vertebrae or racke-bones of the Chine, and therefore it is improperly saide that the Opticke Nerues doe arise from * 1.397 the Spinall Marrow. We answere, that we haue before sufficiently satisfied this doubte in the 15. chapter of this Booke, yet for further contentment (if they will bee contented with reason) we answere by instance; doe not the Nerues of the Sight, Hearing and of * 1.398 the rest of the senses receyue their names from the Organes to which they are destinated before they touch those Organes? yea whilst they remaine within the scull? So also this Marrow may be called the Marrow of the backe or the Spinall Marrow before it enter in∣to the Spine. For whilst it remaineth within the scull it is diuided from the Braine, and in it may be obserued proper Fibres belonging to it selfe alone.

Of the After-Braine or Cerebellum.

After we haue done with the spiuall Marrow wee must come vnto the Cerebellum [Tab 25. Fig. 1. BB. fig. 2. Ch. 8, 9, 10] bared from the Membranes, which beside two processes called Vermi-formes which are parts of the substance therof, and beside the two lateral parts

[illustration]

Table 25. Fig. 1. sheweth the Braine taken out of the Scul separated from the Dura Meninx and inuerted, whose right side exhibiteth the Origi∣nall of the Spinal Marrow and the seauen Con∣iugations of the Sinnewes of the Braine, accor∣ding to the ordinary receiued opinion: but the left side sheweth their true originals.

[illustration]

Fig. 2. sheweth the Braine inuerted, & the partes thereof in the Basis distracted, as also the Origi∣nal of the Spinall Marrow out of the braine and the After-braine, the largenesse of the Ventri∣cle, and the originall of the Opticke Nerue out of the Marrow.

[illustration]

TABVLA. XXV.

[illustration]

FIG. I.

[illustration]

FIG. II

• A A A. The Braine.
• BBB, the After-brain.
• CC, the swellings of the braine commonly cald the Ma∣millarie processes.
• D, the beginning of the Marrow of the back, as it is com∣monly beleued.
• E, the termination or end thereof in the Scull.
• F, the originall of the Organes of smelling according to the vulgar opinion.
• H, the originall of the Opticke Nerues, as it is commonlie receiued.
• I, the coate into which the Opticke Nerue is inserted.
• 2. The second paire of sinnewes.
• 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. The coniugations of the sinnewes, whose Ori∣ginall Vesalius himselfe attributeth to the beginning of the Spinal Marrow.
• 8. A branch of the third coniugation as Anatomistes doe beleeue which passeth forward, but we take it to be the third Coniugation.
• 9, A branch of the fift coniugation according to Vesalius, but we esteem it to be a coniugation of it self, and there∣fore cal it the eight paire.
• 10, 11, 12, 13. The barke or shell of the Braine; for 8, 9, 10, 11. is the verie marrow of the Braine it selfe, and these two are not cōtinual but only contiguous, or touching one another.
• a, b. The whole Optick Nerue, and at b. is the reflection of the Nerue to the back-part of the Spinall Marrow.
• c, The coition or concurse of the Optick Nerues.
• d e. A part of the second Nerue not commonly knovvne, whose originall is at e.
• f, g, h. The Marrow of the Braine lengthened and determi∣ning in the spinall Marrow.
• k. The transuerse processe of the After-braine which is cal∣led the Bridge.
• i, i. the Auditorie Nerue arising out of this processe.
• l, m. the passage of the Organ of smelling lurking between the vpper and middle prominence of the Braine, and at l. is his originall.
• n, the middle prominence of the Braine diuided from the rest of the Braine.
• o, the beginning of the backward prominence of the brain from whence the middle was dissected.
• p, the intercussation which the Optick Nerue maketh with the Nerue that mooueth the eye.

[illustration]

The Second Figure.

• 1, 2, 3. The halfe of the Spinall marrow drawn to one side.
• 4, 5. the coniunction of the same marrow with the ventricle
• 6. A portion of the spinall marrow growing out of the Af∣ter-brain.
• 7. the Optick Nerue reflected in the backpart of the spinall marrow and entering into the cauity of the Ventricle.
• 8, 9, 10. the lefte side of the After-braine from which the right side is remooued.
• 11, 12. A slit going vnto the second Ventricle, vvhich slit is formed partly by the bodie of the Arch, partly from
• the inner part of the Spinall Marrow.
• 13, 14. The Coniunction of the right and the left sides of the Braine by the Callous body.

[illustration]

a. The right part of the Spinall Marrow reflected vpward to his owne side, that so the originall therof which is in the cauity of the Ventricle might be perceyued. c, b. The beginning of this Marrow as it respecteth the hollownesse of the Ventricle. d, e. The Optick Nerue reflected about the roote of the Spinall Marrow.

The first originall of the Optick Nerue. f, g, h. The whole Cauity of the Ventricle, f sheweth the Anterior, g the middle, and h the Posterior Cauity hollowed in the Braine. i, k. The complication of vessels cald Ple∣xus Choroides about the roote of the spinall Marrow in the ventricle. l, m. A portion of the Basis of the brain which together with the Spinall Marrow maketh the cleft which entreth into the ventricle. n, o. the length of the callous body which ioyneth together the two sides of the Braine. p, q, r. Portions of the braine refle∣cted backward that the cauity of the ventricle might better be perceyued.

which resemble two bowles closed together, of which wee spake sufficiently before in the 14. chapter of this booke: there remaineth yet another processe thereof to be exhibited & manifested vnto you.

This processe is a very notable one, [tab. 25, figure. 1, ^k] arising on eyther side out of the * 1.399 Cerebellum neere the trunks wherof the spinall marrow is amassed, and runneth ouerthwart forward and downeward, by the mediation whereof this After-braine imbraceth the fore∣part of the spinall marrow after the same manner that the transuersall or ouerthwart mus∣cles of the Larynx making the third paire of common muscles doth imbrace the back-part of the beginning of the oesophagus or Gullet and thence are called oesophagaei: and this pro∣cesse is distinguished by a course of ouerthwart fibres with a kinde of eminency from the right fibres of the spinall marrow.

This processe Varollius calleth pontem Cerebelli, the bridge of the After-braine, from the similitude it hath with a bridge, because vnder it the spinall marrow runneth as a streame runneth vnder a bridge.

At this processe the nerue of hearing hangeth and hence ariseth, [table 25, fig. 1, ⁱⁱ] so that we may boldly auouch that the Cerebellum is also the first originall of the sense of hearing. * 1.400 And this beginning of the auditory nerue teacheth vs the cause why more from their infā∣cy are deaf then destitute of any other sense; for because the nerues proceed from the after-brain and run no long course, they are easily filled and choaked with Mucous and slimy ex∣crements; & this is the reason, as saith Cassius in his 17 Probleme, why children from their * 1.401 infancy loose their hearing of both eares together, whereas vpon an accidentall disease it is more vsuall to haue one alone vitiated.

Seeing therefore almost halfe of the spinall marrow and this processe or bridge from which the auditory nerue ariseth do proceede from the After-braine; Varollius thinketh that Galen hath great wrong to be taxed by the late Writers, when as they affirme against * 1.402 him, that no nerue hath his originall from the Cerebellum: for saith hee, some nerues arise onely from the braine and not from the After-braine as the optick sinewes; some from the After-braine only and not from the braine as the auditory nerues; some from them both together as the nerues of the spine: but no nerue ariseth immediately out of any of the two * 1.403 principles but all out of their owne principles eyther by the mediation of the spinall mar∣row or by the mediation of that transuerse processe which we called the Bridge.

Of the Nerues of the eyes.

Next followeth the nerues of the eyes, and because there are two payre of them, the one called optici, the other motorij because they moue the eyes; we will first speake of the opticks. They say they arise out of the basis of the braine but toward the forepart, [table 25, fig. 1, ⁱ] whereas indeed a great part of them proceedeth farther, [table 25, fig. 1, from ^p to ^b] * 1.404 and lurking in a certaine space formed betweene the braine and the beginning of the spi∣nall marrow, they runne out toward the occiput where they arise [tab. 25, fig. 2, sheweth their originall] out of the beginning of the former trunkes of the spinall marrow, [tab. 25, fig. 2, ^{b c}] where they respect the cauity of the ventricles of the brain, [tab. 25, fig. 2, ^g] and in the backpart thereof they are reflected toward the middest. [tab. 25, fig. 2, ^{d e}] Wherefore seeing the originall of these nerues is almost in the occipitium, it followeth (as also wee finde * 1.405 it true by daily experience) that Cauteries applyed to the Occipitium are of great vse in the diseases of the eyes: which out of question hapeneth because the originall or beginning of the opticke sinewes beeing depurated and confirmed the visible spirits haue freer recourse vnto the eyes.

If you would demonstrate these sinewes you must remoue the Pia mater at that place where the Opticks are commonly saide to arise; but carefully that you hurt not the nerue, * 1.406 & then you may perceiue that the brain there is only contiguall; thē draw the brain lightly forward from the marrow till you finde the Opticks there lurking, and if you thrust a probe without violence betweene them and the parts to which they adheare, you may lift them from the subiected parts till you come to their originall, and withall you shall perceiue where the spinall marrow taketh his beginning out of the braine. They say commonly that the mouing nerues [ta. 25, fi. 1, Ch. ²] haue their beginning neere the Opticks, a little more ourward; but if you dissect a part of the brain toward the midst you shal perceiue them * 1.407 distinguished from the brain to attaine to the middle of the head & to passe vnder the Op∣ticks after they haue made an intercussion, [Table. 25, figure. 1, ^d] that is, haue crossed one the other, and do arise at the inner part of the beginning of the spinall martow, [Table. 25,

figure 1.^e] and in their originall are so vnited that they touch one another in one corner, * 1.408 which haply is the cause why both the eyes are together moued to the same side.

That the rest of the coniugations of the sinewes of the braine do yssue from the Spinall marrow, Vesalius is content to affirme, excepting onely the third. Columbus acknowled∣geth that third with all the subsequent coniugations to arise from the said marrow, and for the two first paires we haue euen now proued their originall: it remaineth that we proceed to the instruments of smelling.

The instruments of Smelling or the Mammillary processes.

The instruments of smelling or the antertor processes of the braine which proceed out∣ward betwixt the optick nerues vnto the fissure of the spongie-bone scituated at the toppe * 1.409 of the nose, are commonly esteemed to arise out of the Basis of the braine [tab. 25. fig. 1. ^F] neare the coniunction of the opticke nerues [Tab. 25. fig. 1. ^c.] But the truth is, that Ana∣tomists hitherto haue shewed onely the one halfe of these instruments; for beside that they doe shew [table 25. figu. 1. from ^m forward] they proceede as much more [Table 25. figure 1. from ^m to ^l] lurking betwixt the forward and the middle swelling of the braine, for their progresse is backeward, and by how much they reach further, by so much is the distance more betwixt them. They are also by little and little attenuated, growing thinne vntill they determine into a sharpe poynte at the sides of the braine almost at the vtmost limite thereof [Table 25. figure 1. at n] which is aboue the holes where the ayre beateth into the eare, for this is the place of their originall. And hence haply it is that if the smelling bee * 1.410 intercepted; the hearing also is somwhat affected; for we see that when vpon a cold or murr (as we cal it) the nose is stopped and the smell hindred, the hearing also is somewhat offen∣ded: wee also manifestly perceiue that when wee sneeze or blowe our nose or retayne our * 1.411 breath by shutting vp our nosthrils, the hearing is also instantly interrupted, and those that loose their smell doe verie easily become deafe: it may also bee that from this sympathy that Probleme of Aristotle the fift of the 11. Section, and the 23 of Cassius, Why those that be deafe do speake through the nose may be assoyled.

Of the Venticles of the Brain.

These things being thus demonstrated, and the eyes with the optick nerues being drawn each into their owne side, you must lengthwise cut into two partes the bridge of the Cere∣bellum * 1.412 and the spinall marrow, then must you remoue the Cerebellum quite away, and one part of the spinall marrow so deuided lengthwise as we sayde before must be drawne to his owne side, and one side of the braine both before and behind must be cut to shew the mag∣nitude and figure of the ventricles thereof, for this Administration sheweth a great diffe∣rence in the scite, magnitude, forme, number and vse of them from the common demon∣stration.

The receiued opinion is that there are foure ventricles, Arantius in his obseruations accounteth six; foure acknowledged by the antients and vnder these two other; but indeed and trueth by how much the number is increased, by so much is the error the greater, there being in trueth but two, for the braine both of man and beasts being double, as first Hippo∣crates * 1.413 obserued in his Booke of the Falling sicknes, and after him Aristotle in the 10. chapter of his fourth booke de Historia Animalium, it seemeth aequall that each part should haue a ventricle. For these two which they place in the forepart of the braine are as wel seated in the middle and in the hinde-part as they are before: for hetherto scarse their ourth part hath beene demonstrated, their magnitude being answerable & proportionable in respect * 1.414 of their forme to the magnitude of the whole braine, and the swelling prominences there∣of: neither is it to be doubted but that the cauities of the braine while the creature is aliue are farre larger then after he is dead, because after death the braine that was streatched and as it were extended with spirites, when those spirites are vanished falleth into itselfe and so the cauities are lessened and contracted.

Now the braine is on either side long, and where the two sides the right and the left doe regard each other it is plaine and depressed, in other partes it hath sphericall or round productions or prominencies answerable to the hollownes of the bones wherein it is con∣tayned.

The anterior or forward prominence filleth the cauity formed by the forehead bone, a part of the spongy bone, the bone of the sinciput or side of the head and the wedge-bone; * 1.415 the middle and lower prominence filleth on both sides the cauity formed by the backepart of the wedge-bone, the forepart of the stony-bone and the bone of the temples.

The posterior or backward prominency filleth the cauity made by the vpper part of the Occipitium and the latter part of the wedge and stony-bones. And to these prominences * 1.416 the cauity of the ventricles is answerable; for from the forward prominences there runneth a notable bosome or hollownes, euen vnto the latter or backward; which Sinus or hollow∣nesse is so farre distant from the outside of the braine in the back-part as it is in the forepart.

But when it attaineth vnto the angle or corner which is in the vpper part of the stony-bone, it is reflected to the middle and lower prominence of the braine and after the same manner is excauated or hollowed in that prominence or production as it is in the anterior or posterior parts.

But why is the ventricle thus figured? why did Nature neglect the round figure and re∣flect it thus into it selfe? Mercurialis maketh answere; That as in a pond or Lake wherein water may rage, men do frame out some oblique angles, or corners wherein his direct and impetuous course might be broken or as it was in that Hauen into which Aenaeas put in a storme, against the sides whereof Virgil saith:

omnis ab alto Frangitur, in que sinus scindit sese vnda reductos.

The waues are broken from the Mayne, And in the Creekes are cut in twaine:

So Nature to interrupt the violent motion of the spirits, least they should offend the wals as it were the shores of the ventricle, cut out these Angles or set out these Peeres a∣gainst which or in which their violence might be broken.

Furthermore the braine, which without the compasse of the ventricles is very thicke (considering the ventricles as they are commonly demonstrated;) if you haue a respect to these two ventricles as we exhibite them is farre thinner then it is in other parts, and like a shell compasseth these two cauities, which truely might be called but one ventricle were it not distinguished by the interposition of that body which is called Corpus Callosum; [table 25, fig. 2, ^{m n o}] & these only are the ventricles of the brain. Now what those parts are which are commonly called the third & the fourth ventricles it remaineth that we shew vnto you.

The whole braine as also the spinall marrow is diuided into two parts, and is onely ioy∣ned in the middle and lower part by that Callous body we spake of euen now, [Table 25, fig. 2, ^{m n o}] * 1.417 which is nothing else but the braine in that part conioyned. For where the right & the left parts were to be ioyned they are bent a little outward, afterward growing white they are reflected to the middest and so vnited. This vnion hath a kinde of conuexity or embowed figure proportioned to the conuexitie of the braine, which also is as long as the Sagittall suture or seame. Some thinke that it is harder then the other parts, but wee * 1.418 thinke it is as soft as the braine it selfe, and is very white like the inward parts or sides of the ventricles. The interior part of this vnion is ordinarily called Fornix or the Arch.

The two Trunkes produced from the braine being become round do touch another, and so bend somewhat forward; but againe returne backward toward the hole of the Occipitium; * 1.419 and because they are round bodies they make betwixt themselues in their first contaction a a light anguler or cornered cauity vpon which the Basis of the braine beeing vnited doth leane it selfe, so that from the mutuall touch of the bodyes before spoken of that space is formed which they call the third ventricle, which to say truth is without the braine and for∣med * 1.420 not by any intention of Nature but of necessity, because of the coniunction of these bodies.

In the vpper part heereof towards the sides there appeare two long slits or fissures which run almost through the middle circumference of the trunkes of the spinall marrow, and so passe into the ventricles of the braine, and by the way of these fissures the ventricles haue an outlet vnto that they call the third ventricle. And because the foresaide trunkes doe reach as farre as to the Saddle of the wedge-bone where the Tunnell is, therefore it is com∣monly saide that the anterior passage of the third ventricle reacheth vnto that part.

The fourth ventricle so called, is a Sinus or hollownesse betwixt the lower part of the Cerebellum and the vpper trunks of the spinall marrow, where the same spinal marrow is ca∣ued * 1.421 or hollowed like a writing pen. This Sinus or bosome is made of the two trunks procee∣ding out of the Cerebellum for the framing of the spinall marrow, and is lengthened out of the distance of both those propagations of the After-braine. For before they bee vnited with those two other greater trunkes which arise from the braine it selfe, they passe along aboue them a little distant one from the other. So that this cauity like as the other, ariseth

rather vpon necessity of the position of the parts then from any foresight or intention of Nature; because like as the third so also this fourth ventricle is scituated without the braine and the Cerebellum.

That hole which is called the latter foramen of the third ventricle, which some make to * 1.422 be like vnto the fundament and will haue to enter into the fourth ventricle; is nothing else but a space made by the contaction or mutuall touching of the foure trunkes of the spinall marrow where the trunkes of the Cerebellum are bent downeward and adheare or cleaue to the Trunkes arising from the braine.

Here appeare foure orbicular prominences commonly called the Buttocks and the Te∣sticles * 1.423 of the braine, which they commonly affirme to be within the braine though indeed they are without. And these Varollius thinketh to be the true originals of the spinal marrow: * 1.424 and that the buttocks are nothing else but portions of the roots of the spinall marrowe pro∣ceeding out of the Cerebellum, like as the Testicles are small portions of the roots procee∣ding from the Braine.

Concerning the vse of the ventricles, the common opinion is, that they are the concep∣tacles or receptacles of the Animal spirits as the left ventricle of the heart is the place of the * 1.425 vitall spirit. But although we will not deny that there may bee many vses assigned to one and the same part: (and therfore Galen in the tenth chapter of his eight book de vsu parti∣um was of opinion that the vpper ventricles did serue for the preparation of the spirits & * 1.426 also for the expurgation of superfluities,) yet we are of opiniō that these ventricles are the re∣ceptacles * 1.427 of the phlegmatick humor which is ingendered in the braine, which through the infundibulum or Tunnel is conuayed to the phlegmatick glandule and so purged away. For the ventricles haue no where any outlet but onely at the Tunnell: but for the Animall spi∣rits we think that they are disseminated through the whole substance both of the brain & of the After-brain. And this we shew first by the testimony of Hippocrates, who when he had * 1.428 deliuered that man consisted of foure humors, and did assigne to euery one their proper place he saith; That the place of the spirits and of the bloud is in the hart, of yellow choller in the Liuer, of blacke in the spleene. And if the place of phlegme be in the braine there must of necessity be a cauity which may containe it; such as is the ventricle in the heart and the bladder of gall in the Liuer: Now beside these two ventricles there is in the braine no cauity at all.

Secondly, it is proued by the general vse of Glandules which is to sucke vp and consume superfluous humidity. Whereas therefore in these ventricles there are Glandules found in * 1.429 that complication or web of vessels therein disposed; it followeth that phlegme is therein gathered, which distilleth out of that textute or web into the ventricles and there is heaped together; (for they are not able to consume so great a quantity) otherwise both the Glan∣dules should be in vaine added by Nature, and their vse and commodity assigned by Hip∣pocrates should be idle and of no vse.

Furthermore it is acknowledged by all men that the phlegme doth distill from the * 1.430 braine through the Tunnell vnto the Pallet. Now the beginning of the Tunnell is in the ventricle, neyther is there any passage from any part of the braine vnto the Tunnell vnlesse it be out of the said ventricles.

Fourthly, it is proued by an argument taken from necessity: because this phlegmatick * 1.431 excrement did require great and large cauities. For if there had beene no conuenient place wherein a notable quantity thereof might be stabled or heaped together; wee should haue beene troubled with continuall spitting and spawling (euen as they in whose bladders the vrine is not collected and retayned doe continually auoid their water by drisling or drops) and so our speech and other noble actions interrupted. And hence it is that in sleepe a * 1.432 great quantity of this phelgme being collected, after we awake we auoid it plentifully in a short time. Now this quantity because it could not be contained within the Dennes or hol∣low cauities of the nose behooued to haue some other receptacle in the braine wherein it might be reserued till conuenient time of euacuation.

We do also sensibly perceiue that if a man be desirous to spit and therefore sucke the vpper part of his Pallate, he shall gather great quantity of this phlegmatick excrement in∣to the cauity of his mouth and thence spit it foorth. But if hee againe instantly striue to spit he shall auoid a lesse quantity; and so lesse and lesse till by sucking hee can gather no more spittle. But after a short interim or interposition of time the excrement wil againe fal into his mouth; which is a most euident signe that this matter is in some notable quantity

colected or gathered together before it be auoyded as it is in the Vrine & the excremēts of the belly.

We conclude therefore that these Cauities of the ventricles do receyue the foresaid excrements, because those Glandulous complications doe enter into them, and out of * 1.433 them onely are the passages by which the moysture is auoided.

Mercurialis opposeth on this manner. How may it be that so thicke, cold and obscure or dull a humor so contrary to the spirits should be collected in that place where the spi∣rits * 1.434 themselues which are pure and subtle bodies are as it were in an Ouen baked & per∣fected? Moreouer, the causes of an Apoplexie, Epilepsie or Falling sickenesse and the Incubus or Night-Mare are by all Physitians acknowledged to be, when as Flegm or Me∣lancholy, or crasse and thicke winde is reteyned in the Ventricles, which stopping them vp either wholy or for the most part, do strangle the spirits therein conteined, which (as Galen saith in his third Booke De Locis affectis) Hip. signifyed in darke and obscure words in the end of the second Section of the sixt booke Epidemiωn, where he writeth, That the * 1.435 disease called Melancholia hapneth when the humour falleth into the seate of the minde, and the Epilepsie when it falleth into the body of the Brain.

Plato also consenteth with Hippocrates in Timaeo where he writeth, that the Falling sicknesse happeneth when Flegme mingled with Melancholy entreth into the diuine ca∣uities * 1.436 of the braine: Varolius maketh answere on this manner. For the Causes of the Apo∣plexie, * 1.437 Epilepsie and Incubus, although I sometimes read in Hippocrates as in the Ninth Text of his Booke De Glandulis, that the Apoplexy is occasioned by the Corrosion of the braine, and in the nineteenth and twentith Texts of his Booke De Flatibus, that the Epi∣lepsy is caused when the blood is disquieted and defiled in all the veines, as also vvhen * 1.438 the same veines are obstructed. And that I reade in Galen in the seauenth Chapter of his third booke De Locis Affectis, that hee doubted whether the Epilepsy were made by an obstruction of the ventricles of the Braine, or of the Spinall Marrow, and therefore that I willingly graunt that these diseases may haue these causes: yet I conceiue that it wil not abhorre from reason to thinke, that the Ventricles (though the Animall spirits bee con∣teyned in them) are sometimes so fulfilled with a viscid humour or thicke wind, that the * 1.439 first roote of the Spinall Marrow may be compressed by the aboundance thereof, so that the transportation and affluence of the spirits thereunto may bee interrupted and inter∣cepted, and consequently the whole bodye depriued of sense and motion. Like as the bladder in the suppression of the Vrine being beyond measure distended lying hard vp∣on * 1.440 the guts, the auoyding of the excrements is hindred.

And if this answere will not please the pallate, I will say with Galen in the place be∣fore quoted, that the Epilepsy and such like diseases do proceede by the obstructing or immuring * 1.441 of the Spitits, which happeneth when the beginning of the Spinall Marrowe is choaked by an vnnaturall confluence of humours vnto it. And this opinion is confir∣med by the Dissection of the heads of such men as dye Apoplecticall, in the Ventricles of whose brains there is not found any greater quantity of excrements then is common∣ly found in other men.

Furthermore, they Obiect that in the Epilepsy, the Apoplexy and the Incubus the Animal spirits residing in the Ventricles of the Braine are strangled or their outgate hin∣dred. Varolius answeres that these diseases happen not from any humour or winde attey∣ning * 1.442 any way vnto the Ventricles, but by reason of a great quantity and notable thicke∣nesse, or sudden eruption. Wherefore euen as the excrements descending by the pallate and the nose do not offend the taste or the smell if they passe through those Organs mo∣derately and according to Nature, but do either hinder or vtterly intercept their opera∣tions if they exceede the measure and proportion of Nature in quantity or in quality: so we thinke we are to conceiue of the excrements accruing vnto the ventricles of the brain or receding there-from.

Now that the Spirits are dispersed through the substance of the braine, we prooue * 1.443 by the testimony of Galen in the 13. chapter of his eight booke de vsu partium where hee sayth, That the Animal spirite is in great quantity conteyned in the body of the braine, as also of the Cerebellum to which he attributeth the Original or beginning of the nerues of the whole body, and therefore he inferreth that it is necessary it should bee filled vvith the aboundance of spirits.

If therefore the Cerebellum which hath in it no cauity at all doth yet conteyn in his

substance plenty of spirits which flow from it to so many nerues remooued by so great di∣stances therefrom, why may we not beleeue that after the same maner yea a great deale ra∣ther the spirites may bee conuayed without manifest cauities out of the braine to a fewer nerues and those not far distant from it but euen at hand? Seeing therefore that the Ani∣mall * 1.444 spirits can ebbe and flow without any sensible passage; why may wee not ascribe that vnto the substance of the braine which others haue ascribed vnto the ventricles although they haue not duely obserued them?

Of the web or complication called Plexus Choroides.

Finally, the complication or web of vessels which they call Choroides or the Net which * 1.445 is in the ventricles of the braine; [table 25. fig. 2. ^ik] seemeth to be altogether glandulous or kernelly, so that both in substance and colour it may be likened to the Pine-glandule wee spake of in the 12. Chapter; yet if you handle it nicely and mark it diligently you snall find * 1.446 that it is nothing else but a heape of broade and long membranes growing out of the pia mater of the braine, at the one side whereof through out their whole length hangeth a lit∣tle thicke vessell full of excrementitious moysture, through which exceeding small vessels are deriued: & if we may compare little things with great, it is like a gut tyed vnto the me∣sentery, yet for the proportion there are in it more glandules then in the mesentery of the lower belly. And this manifestly appeareth in their heads whose braines are very moyst & therefore sayeth Varolius, it were more agreeable to their nature to call them Glandulous then Net-like complications.

And if any man doubt whether the substance of them be such as we haue saide, wee re∣mit him vnto his own ocular inspection, ther being no argument of greater valliditie. For * 1.447 sayth Varolius in all carkasses which we haue opened, we haue found these glandules full of such a muddy moysture as we finde in the rest of the Glandules of the body. Albeit Archan∣gelus doe thinke that such excrements are onely found in diseased braines.

The vse of this glandulous complication seemeth to be; that like other glandules it might * 1.448 sucke vp the superfluous moysture of the brain, for that is the office of the glandules in the whole body: yea Hippocrates himselfe in the second Text of his Booke de glandulis, proueth by an induction of the particular glandules of the whole body, that when the body aboun∣deth with superfluous humidity it is thereof exonerated and discharged by the glandules; yea he proceedeth so far as to say that the whole substance of the braine is glandulous.

Now concerning the rest of the parts of the braine of which in this new demonstrati∣on or dissection wee haue made no mention, you must conceiue of them as their histories are described before.

But if a man bee desirous in this kinde of Section to demonstrate or exhibite to the * 1.449 spectators all the parts, then must he proceede in this order. After he hath taken away all the bones of the head by sawing them through the length aboue and beneath, before and behinde; he must first make demonstration of the Sinus or vessels of the dura meninx. Af∣terward turne the head and at the Basis of the braine separate the Meninx from the spinall marrow, yet must he leaue portions of the Meninx about the nerues that they be not bro∣ken, for then you cannot follow them to their originall.

Vnder the membrane which inuesteth the spinall marrow there appeareth a texture or web of vessels diuersly crossing one another, which they commonly call Rete-mirabile, the * 1.450 Wonderfull Net; then the flegmatick glādule commeth in sight which is almost square, & the neck of the Tunnel which are scituated without the thick Meninx. From hence our eye passeth vnto the membrane of the spinall marrow and the marrow it selfe; which being lif∣ted vp we behold the buttockes, the testicles, the passage into the fourth ventricle and the fourth ventricle it selfe, all which are without the braine. Wee see also the After-braine, the processes thereof, the auditory nerue, the mouing nerues of the eye together with the opticks, the organs of smelling, the two ventricles of the braine together with their passage into the Tunnell, as also the Callous body, the Arch, the Complication called Choroides, and the Pine-glandule. And thus much concerning Varolius his newe way of dissecting the head, which we haue added as an accomplishment to this Booke of the braine, because indeed after this manner all the parts thereof are best showne and to best purpose. Now we proceed to the Controuersies.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Why the bo∣dy is made of many organs.
• * 1.2

  why the spirit was created.
• * 1.3

  The second principle.
• * 1.4

  How the bo∣dy is like the world.
• * 1.5

  The lower Region.
• * 1.6

  The Liuer.
• * 1.7

  The Naturall faculty.
• * 1.8

  The partes of Generation.
• * 1.9

  The Testicles
• * 1.10

  The Middle Region.
• * 1.11

  The Heart.
• * 1.12

  The Vitall fa∣culty.
• * 1.13

  The vpper Region.
• * 1.14

  The Braine.
• * 1.15

  The Animall Faculty.
• * 1.16

  The names of the head.
• * 1.17

  A strict signi∣fication. Celsus descrip∣tion of the Head.
• * 1.18

  Skonce.
• * 1.19

  The large sig∣nification.
• * 1.20

  The forme.
• * 1.21

  Why round.
• * 1.22

  Why com∣pressed.
• * 1.23

  More on the fore-part.
• * 1.24

  Naturall heads.
• * 1.25

  Vnnaturall.
• * 1.26

  Thersites in Homer.
• * 1.27

  The magni∣tude.
• * 1.28

  A little head.
• * 1.29

  A great head.
• * 1.30

  Hippocrater ex∣pounded.
• * 1.31

  Aristotle ex∣pounded.
• * 1.32

  The scituati∣on.
• * 1.33

  Galen. Auerrhoes.
• * 1.34

  Why the brain is set highest.
• * 1.35

  The parts of the head and their names.
• * 1.36

  The parts of the scalp.
• * 1.37

  Hippocrates. Aristotle.
• * 1.38

  Galen.
• * 1.39

  Another diui¦sion of the parts. Containing.
• * 1.40

  Contained.
• * 1.41

  5. common parts.
• * 1.42

  Aristotle.
• * 1.43

  Galen
• * 1.44

  Pollux. Eschylus.
• * 1.45

  The skin of the head.
• * 1.46

  Aristotle redee¦med.
• * 1.47

  The veines.
• * 1.48

  Arteries.
• * 1.49

  An elegant place in Galen
• * 1.50

  Archangelus. Why the skin of the head hath but a dul sence.
• * 1.51

  The vse.
• * 1.52

  The fat.
• * 1.53

  Platerus.
• * 1.54

  Vesalius. Columbus
• * 1.55

  The Fleshie Membrane. Fallopius.
• * 1.56

  Pericranium.
• * 1.57

  Fallopius.
• * 1.58

  His originall.
• * 1.59

  Progresse.
• * 1.60

  His vse.
• * 1.61

  Platerus.
• * 1.62

  Periostium. Falopius. Bauhine.
• * 1.63

  How the Bones ••ecle.
• * 1.64

  The Muscles about the head.
• * 1.65

  A double Fi∣gure of the head. Natural.
• * 1.66

  Depraued 5.
• * 1.67

  Difference of Anatomists.
• * 1.68

  A fift Figure.
• * 1.69

  A sixt.
• * 1.70

  A seauenth seene in Lin∣colnshire.
• * 1.71

  The skul.
• * 1.72

  Proper su∣tures. True.
• * 1.73

  False sutures.
• * 1.74

  Common su∣tures fiue.
• * 1.75

  The vses of the sutures.
• * 1.76

  The substāce of the skul.
• * 1.77

  His tables.
• * 1.78

  Meditullium,
• * 1.79

  His perfora∣tions.
• * 1.80

  The proper bones of the Head.
• * 1.81

  The forhead bone.
• * 1.82

  the side bones Ossa syncipitis.
• * 1.83

  The Noddle bone.
• * 1.84

  The temple bones.
• * 1.85

  The Wedge-bone.
• * 1.86

  The Spongie bone.
• * 1.87

  The vse of it.
• * 1.88

  Galen. Hippocrates.
• * 1.89

  Their names.
• * 1.90

  The dura ma∣ter.
• * 1.91

  His figure & magnitude.
• * 1.92

  Connexion.
• * 1.93

  Whether the braine mooue or no. Platerus. Columbus. Ar∣changelus. Laurentius.
• * 1.94

  It is double but not two.
• * 1.95

  His holes or passages.
• * 1.96

  His Redupli∣cation.
• * 1.97

  The Sythe.
• * 1.98

  The other processe of the Dura Me∣ninx.
• * 1.99

  A bone is Dogges.
• * 1.100

  Two kinds of Cauities.
• * 1.101

  Fallopius his ten Sinus.
• * 1.102

  Foure Sinus of the Dura mater.
• * 1.103

  Pelops his er∣ror whence. The two first. Sinus.
• * 1.104

  Galen.
• * 1.105

  The Presse of the braine.
• * 1.106

  The third.
• * 1.107

  Branches frō the 3. Sinus.
• * 1.108

  Great quanti∣ty of bloud out of the nose whence it comes.
• * 1.109

  Columbus Archangelus.
• * 1.110

  The fourth.
• * 1.111

  Branches frō the 4. Sinus.
• * 1.112

  The vpper.
• * 1.113

  Where the 4 sinus endeth.
• * 1.114

  The matter of these sinus.
• * 1.115

  They doe the office of veins and arteries.
• * 1.116

  why the brain needeth much blood.
• * 1.117

  The vse of the Dura Mater.
• * 1.118

  The Pia mater or tenuis Me∣ninx.
• * 1.119

  His Names.
• * 1.120

  His figure. Magnitude.
• * 1.121

  Substance.
• * 1.122

  The counsel of Nature.
• * 1.123

  The progresse of it.
• * 1.124

  Archangelus.
• * 1.125

  The vse of the pia mater.
• * 1.126

  The veines.
• * 1.127

  The inner iu∣gular.
• * 1.128

  The vtter Iu∣gular.
• * 1.129

  Another vein of Vesalius his finding:
• * 1.130

  The arteries.
• * 1.131

  The first
• * 1.132

  The second.
• * 1.133

  The third.
• * 1.134

  A fourth.
• * 1.135

  The Sinus of the Dura me∣ninx.
• * 1.136

  The vse of the veines.
• * 1.137

  The vse of the Arterres.
• * 1.138

  A diuision of the Head.
• * 1.139

  Aristotle.
• * 1.140

  The braine the principall part of the whole body, and why.
• * 1.141

  The defences of the braine.
• * 1.142

  The excellen∣cy of the vse of it.
• * 1.143

  Comparison.
• * 1.144

  Arist: dreame.
• * 1.145

  The common sence is the braine.
• * 1.146

  Aphrodisaeut.
• * 1.147

  Platoes
• * 1.148

  Comparison
• * 1.149

  The braine not the prince but a prin∣cipal part.
• * 1.150

  Columbus his reason.
• * 1.151

  The name: of the braine.
• * 1.152

  Sophocles.
• * 1.153

  A greeke phrayse.
• * 1.154

  Figure.
• * 1.155

  Magnitude. Aristotle.
• * 1.156

  Connexion.
• * 1.157

  Substance. Archangelus Praxagoras. Philotimus.
• * 1.158

  Aristotle.
• * 1.159

  Vesalius
• * 1.160

  why the brain is white.
• * 1.161

  Comparison.
• * 1.162

  Why soft.
• * 1.163

  Why not like to Fat.
• * 1.164

  Why it mel∣teth not.
• * 1.165

  The tempera∣ment of the Braine.
• * 1.166

  The Reason thereof.
• * 1.167

  why the brain hath diuerse parts.
• * 1.168

  3 Parts.
• * 1.169

  The forepart.
• * 1.170

  Subdiuided.
• * 1.171

  The vse of this diuision Out of Vesali∣us.
• * 1.172

  Out of Lauren¦tius.
• * 1.173

  Out of Bau∣bine.
• * 1.174

  The conuolu¦tions of the braine.
• * 1.175

  Their vses.
• * 1.176

  Galen.
• * 1.177

  Platerus.
• * 1.178

  Another vse out of Bauhine Archangelus. Laurentius.
• * 1.179

  Erasistratus his 〈…〉〈…〉.
• * 1.180

  Archangelus taxeth Colum∣bus and Lau∣rentius.
• * 1.181

  Another vse out of Vesalius & Laurentius.
• * 1.182

  The inward part of the Braine.
• * 1.183

  The Shell & the Kernell.
• * 1.184

  The kernel or marrow.
• * 1.185

  Note this.
• * 1.186

  A difficult place in Hip.
• * 1.187

  Aristotle.
• * 1.188

  Vesalius.
• * 1.189

  Commenda∣tion of Hip.
• * 1.190

  The corpus Callosum.
• * 1.191

  Archangelus.
• * 1.192

  The vse of it.
• * 1.193

  A story out of Bauhine.
• * 1.194

  The septum lucidum.
• * 1.195

  Diuersly com¦pared.
• * 1.196

  The names of it.
• * 1.197

  The substāce of it. Galen & Vesa∣lius Columbus & Archangelus.
• * 1.198

  The ventri∣cles of the braine.
• * 1.199

  Their figure.
• * 1.200

  The water in them.
• * 1.201

  Whether they bee li∣ned with the Pia mater. Vesalius a∣gainst Galen.
• * 1.202

  The cause of deepe paines in the head.
• * 1.203

  Why two ven∣tricles out of Galen.
• * 1.204

  A story by him cited.
• * 1.205

  Vesalius op∣pugneth him not without some reason.
• * 1.206

  The vses of these ventri∣tricles. Galen.
• * 1.207

  Archangelus. Laurentius.
• * 1.208

  Archangelus his other vses
• * 1.209

  Bauhine.
• * 1.210

  A passage to be obserued.
• * 1.211

  Galen explay∣ned.
• * 1.212

  The 3. ventri∣cle.
• * 1.213

  Galen.
• * 1.214

  The forme of It after Galen.
• * 1.215

  The two pas∣sages thereof.
• * 1.216

  The first.
• * 1.217

  Second.
• * 1.218

  Another pas∣sage.
• * 1.219

  Vesalius tax∣eth Galen.
• * 1.220

  The vse of the 3. ventri∣cle.
• * 1.221

  The Fornix or arch.
• * 1.222

  His names.
• * 1.223

  And delinea∣tion.
• * 1.224

  His figure. Galen.
• * 1.225

  Substance.
• * 1.226

  The Plexus Choroides. The names.
• * 1.227

  what it is.
• * 1.228

  Diuers des∣criptions thereof.
• * 1.229

  Archangelus.
• * 1.230

  Laurentius.
• * 1.231

  Vesalius & Platerus.
• * 1.232

  Fallopius.
• * 1.233

  Bauhine.
• * 1.234

  The vse of the Plexus Choroides.
• * 1.235

  Platerus his conceit of the vse of it.
• * 1.236

  The Pine∣glandule.
• * 1.237

  Calfes heads fit to cut vp.
• * 1.238

  Substance.
• * 1.239

  Vse.
• * 1.240

  Archangelus his conceit.
• * 1.241

  Disproued.
• * 1.242

  The Testicles and Buttocks.
• * 1.243

  Their vse.
• * 1.244

  The fourth ventricle.
• * 1.245

  The Figure.
• * 1.246

  Calamus scrip∣torius.
• * 1.247

  The magni∣tude.
• * 1.248

  Herophysus.
• * 1.249

  The vse of it. Vesalius his conceite dis∣proued.
• * 1.250

  What euery one of the vē∣tricles con∣teine.
• * 1.251

  The Tunnell.
• * 1.252

  His Names.
• * 1.253

  Vesalius.
• * 1.254

  Glandula pitu∣itaria.
• * 1.255

  His substance
• * 1.256

  Vse.
• * 1.257

  Hippocrates.
• * 1.258

  Wonderful Net.
• * 1.259

  Wherof made
• * 1.260

  The vse of it.
• * 1.261

  Bauhine. Vesalius.
• * 1.262

  The way how to demostrate these parts.
• * 1.263

  Net. The vse of the Braine.
• * 1.264

  Diuerse
• * 1.265

  Galen.
• * 1.266

  The Animall spirit.
• * 1.267

  Aristotles Comparisons.
• * 1.268

  The seate of the sensatiue soule.
• * 1.269

  Animall mo∣tion & sense.
• * 1.270

  Natural sense
• * 1.271

  Galen.
• * 1.272

  Fernelius his Philosophy a∣bout this.
• * 1.273

  The motion of the braine.
• * 1.274

  Vesalius a∣gainst Galen.
• * 1.275

  Laurentius.
• * 1.276

  What we re∣solue of.
• * 1.277

  The vse of the motion.
• * 1.278

  How the mo∣tion is discer∣ned.
• * 1.279

  The Animal spirits.
• * 1.280

  A witty con∣ceit of Ar∣changelus.
• * 1.281

  Diuers opini∣ons of the ge¦neration of the Animall spirits.
• * 1.282

  Galens.
• * 1.283

  Vesalius.
• * 1.284

  Columbus.
• * 1.285

  Argenterius.
• * 1.286

  Archangelus.
• * 1.287

  Laurentius.
• * 1.288

  Varolius. What we re∣solue of.
• * 1.289

  Bauhine.
• * 1.290

  Platerus.
• * 1.291

  The reason of the diuision of the Braine.
• * 1.292

  Galen.
• * 1.293

  Vesalius.
• * 1.294

  Why the braine is a∣boue the af∣ter braine. The after-braine. Aristotle.
• * 1.295

  His connecti∣on.
• * 1.296

  The forme of the after-braine.
• * 1.297

  The parts of it.
• * 1.298

  The Line.
• * 1.299

  Why superfi∣ciary.
• * 1.300

  The substance
• * 1.301

  The quantity.
• * 1.302

  The Sinus.
• * 1.303

  Platerus. Galen.
• * 1.304

  The wormy processes.
• * 1.305

  Aurantius.
• * 1.306

  Archangelus, his opinion of the substance of the wormy processe.
• * 1.307

  The first pro∣cesse.
• * 1.308

  Galens vse of the wormy processes.
• * 1.309

  The 2 pro∣cesse.
• * 1.310

  Their vse.
• * 1.311

  The vse of the Cerebellum.
• * 1.312

  Varolius.
• * 1.313

  What true marrow is.
• * 1.314

  Why the Braine is cal∣led marrow. Plate.
• * 1.315

  The names of the pith.
• * 1.316

  A double ac∣ceptation of the spinall marrow.
• * 1.317

  The parts of the Braine.
• * 1.318

  Archangelus. An elegant Comparison.
• * 1.319

  The marrow double. Globous.
• * 1.320

  Long.
• * 1.321

  The originall of the spinal marrow.
• * 1.322

  Ecclesiastea.
• * 1.323

  Diuers opini∣ons. Hippocrates opinion. Galen. The common opinion. Vesalius. Archangelus. Platerus.
• * 1.324

  Columbus.
• * 1.325

  Varollius.
• * 1.326

  Laurentius.
• * 1.327

  The seimatiō
• * 1.328

  and propor∣tion thereof.
• * 1.329

  The spinall Marrow pro∣perly so cal∣led.
• * 1.330

  Galen.
• * 1.331

  His course.
• * 1.332

  The 3. Mem∣branes of the Marrow. The first.
• * 1.333

  The vse of the humor.
• * 1.334

  The second and third Membrane.
• * 1.335

  The vessels of the marrow.
• * 1.336

  His substance.
• * 1.337

  Galen.
• * 1.338

  What it hath common with the Braine.
• * 1.339

  The figure.
• * 1.340

  His cauity. Calamus scrip∣torius.
• * 1.341

  Archangelus.
• * 1.342

  How it may be saide to be deuided and where.
• * 1.343

  Whereof his nerues are made & how they yssue.
• * 1.344

  Rondeletius.
• * 1.345

  Laurentius.
• * 1.346

  A hard pro∣bleme explai∣ned.
• * 1.347

  The vse of the spinal marow
• * 1.348

  The 5. senses.
• * 1.349

  and their nerues.
• * 1.350

  Why be asts smell better then men. Their origi∣nall.
• * 1.351

  Fallopius.
• * 1.352

  Their vse.
• * 1.353

  How they may be called nerues.
• * 1.354

  The optick nerues.
• * 1.355

  Their double substance.
• * 1.356

  Marrowey.
• * 1.357

  Their mem∣branes.
• * 1.358

  The 2. coniu∣gations of the mouing nerues. Their fraine.
• * 1.359

  Note this.
• * 1.360

  Their vse. Why both eies moue to∣gether.
• * 1.361

  The 3. Con∣iugation.
• * 1.362

  His Original.
• * 1.363

  Issue. 4. Branches.
• * 1.364

  The fourth Coniugation.
• * 1.365

  The reason of his Originall.
• * 1.366

  Where it ys∣sueth.
• * 1.367

  It hath three branches.
• * 1.368

  How the teeth haue sense.
• * 1.369

  The fift Con∣iugation.
• * 1.370

  His 2. surcles.
• * 1.371

  His out-gate.
• * 1.372

  The true Or∣gan of hea∣ring.
• * 1.373

  That the sixt Coniugation is not one but two Nerues.
• * 1.374

  Where it issu∣eth.
• * 1.375

  The course of it.
• * 1.376

  The seauenth Coniugation.
• * 1.377

  His originall
• * 1.378

  and course.
• * 1.379

  The eight Coniugation.
• * 1.380

  Seauen or 8. paires of the Necke.
• * 1.381

  Twelue paire of the Chest.
• * 1.382

  The third and all the rest.
• * 1.383

  The nerues of the Loynes fiue paire.
• * 1.384

  The nerues of the Os sa∣crum.
• * 1.385

  The other fiue.
• * 1.386

  The vse of this chapter.
• * 1.387

  Varolius his inuention.
• * 1.388

  How admni∣stred.
• * 1.389

  The admini∣stratiō of the spinall mar∣row.
• * 1.390

  The 4 rootes thereof.
• * 1.391

  Where ioined
• * 1.392

  Galen ackno∣ledgeth the truth of this.
• * 1.393

  He is taxedby Columbus. Redeemed by Varolius.
• * 1.394

  Why the ori∣ginals of the sinnews grow into one.
• * 1.395

  Hipp. & Plato insinuate so much,
• * 1.396

  why the spinal marow ariseth out of the cē∣ter of the braine.
• * 1.397

  Obiection.
• * 1.398

  Answere by instance.
• * 1.399

  The processe called the Bridge.
• * 1.400

  How the au∣ditory nerue ariseth out of the Bridge.
• * 1.401

  Two pretty questions re∣solued.
• * 1.402

  Galen iniured by the Neote∣ricks.
• * 1.403

  Varollius.
• * 1.404

  The common receiued ori∣ginall

  The true ori∣ginall.
• * 1.405

  Why Caure∣ries at the necke helpe the eyes.
• * 1.406

  How to de∣monstrate the Opticke nerues.
• * 1.407

  The mouing nerues.
• * 1.408

  Why both cies moue to∣gether.
• * 1.409

  Their cōmon receiued ori∣ginall.
• * 1.410

  Their true o∣riginal.
• * 1.411

  Of the simpa∣thy between hearing and smelling.
• * 1.412

  How we must proceed in this kind of section.
• * 1.413

  Hippocrates Aristotle.
• * 1.414

  The magni∣tude of the ventricles.
• * 1.415

  The anterior prominence.
• * 1.416

  The posterior
• * 1.417

  What are the 3. and 4. ven∣tricles com∣monly so cal∣led.
• * 1.418

  The Corpus Callosum.
• * 1.419

  The Arch of the Braine.
• * 1.420

  The third ventricle.
• * 1.421

  The fourth ventricle.
• * 1.422

  The funda∣ment of the Braine.
• * 1.423

  The buttocks and Testicles.
• * 1.424

  The true ori∣ginals of the spinal marrow after Varollius
• * 1.425

  The vse of the ventricles.
• * 1.426

  Galen.
• * 1.427

  That the ven∣tricles receiue the phlegme.
• * 1.428

  Hippocrates his first reasō.
• * 1.429

  2. reason.
• * 1.430

  3. reason.
• * 1.431

  4. reason.
• * 1.432

  Many instan∣ces from our sence.
• * 1.433

  What we con¦clude.
• * 1.434

  Mercurialis his obiections.
• * 1.435

  Hippocrates.
• * 1.436

  Plato.
• * 1.437

  Varolius his answere to Mercurialis.
• * 1.438

  The causes of the Apoplexie Hippocrates. Galen.
• * 1.439

  Do not con∣tradict Varoli∣us opinion.
• * 1.440

  Another satis∣faction.
• * 1.441

  This opinion. Confirmed by Dissection
• * 1.442

  Another Ob∣iection. Answered.
• * 1.443

  That the spi∣rits are in the substance of the Braine. Galen.
• * 1.444

  The conclusi∣on.
• * 1.445

  Of the Plexus Choroides.
• * 1.446

  What it is.
• * 1.447

  That it is glā∣dulous.
• * 1.448

  The vse of this complica∣tion.
• * 1.449

  How this section must be admini∣stred.
• * 1.450

  How the par∣ticular parts of the braine arise.